Blog

Diving Is – Does Sinaumed’s like sports? If so, what sports have Sinaumed’s done so far? Is it limited to badminton, football, basketball, volleyball, futsal and cycling? Well, most sports are done on land. However, has it ever occurred to Sinaumed’s to do sports activities under the sea, for example diving or snorkeling? Moreover, coupled with the beauty of the natural panorama that is under the Indonesian sea, it will definitely increase our enthusiasm to explore it. Not only will you meet various types of colorful fish, but there are also coral reefs and sea plants that are snaking. Just a little trivia here, Indonesia’s seas are already known for their beauty which is famous to foreign countries, for example in Raja Ampat, the Banda Islands, Bunaken, to Komodo Island.

Unfortunately, not everyone can do this underwater sport because they have to get a license first. However, if Sinaumed’s has not yet obtained a license but still wants to dive to the bottom of the sea, a professional can also accompany him. Until now, diving is still very popular among young people. So, what is the sport of diving? What are the types of sports diving? What equipment should be used when you want to do diving? What is the difference between diving and snorkeling, which are both under the sea? So, so that Sinaumed’s understands these things, let’s look at the following review!

What is Diving?

Basically, diving is a sporting activity in the form of diving under water for a long time with certain equipment and the objectives are varied. Diving is often also called scuba diving which is done by many people for various purposes, ranging from sports, just recreation to enjoy the beauty of the underwater, to conducting research. The main thing needed for this sport of diving is the ability to swim and a diving certificate.

So what if our swimming ability is mediocre? Reporting from detik.com , it turns out that to explore underwater panoramas by diving, you don’t have to be able to swim , you know , as long as you are good at diving. Later, we will still be accompanied by a professional and teach them to stay calm, especially when getting into the water. So, if Sinaumed’s is very interested in getting this diving certificate, don’t worry, because currently there are many diving training course institutions spread across major cities in Indonesia.

In addition, diving must also be done with a variety of special equipment and equipment. Starting from swimsuits, swimming goggles, oxygen cylinders, frog legs, to special vests. Well, even though this diving activity is done by diving, our body position doesn’t have to be prone as if we were swimming. When we reach the seabed, we can walk or even use marine propulsion vehicles.

A Brief History of Diving

When talking about the history of diving, aka diving, until it finally developed into a popular sport, surely no one can say for sure. But apparently, diving as a profession has existed since human civilization was formed. Yep, primitive humans have indeed carried out this diving activity with the simplest technique and without the aid of any tools. The more their mindset develops, the more they think about the simple tools used for this diving activity. For example, to clarify their vision while in the water, they will make simple swimming goggles where the frames are made of bamboo, walnut kernels, or wood.

Well, in Indonesia, especially in the world of wayang, this diving activity has also been mentioned. Through the character Raden Jayakatwang, for example, who is one of the sons of Aria Bima, has expertise in the form of diving in the sea. Apart from that, there are also Pearl Diving activities that have been carried out by the people of Maluku for centuries.

Basic Diving Techniques

Based on the research journal article Review of Diving , there are 3 basic techniques in this sport of diving, namely Breath Hold Diving, SCUBA Diving, and SSBA Diving. Well, here’s the description!

1. Breath Hold Diving / Skin Diving

This basic technique has two kinds, namely in the form of Googling and Snorkeling.

a) Googling

This technique is called so because the diving uses goggles. Usually, it is used by nature divers and fishermen to find pearls, sea cucumbers, shoot fish, and others. Unfortunately, this technique actually makes it difficult for divers to equalize, so they are prone to eye squeeze and baro-trauma to the ears.

b) Snorkeling

Namely a diving technique that uses a tool in the form of a glass mask (face mask) to cover the eyes and nose, as well as a snorkel. How to dive is almost the same as googling, only this one is even easier. This is because the presence of a glass mask will make it easier for divers to equalize and swim on the surface without having to raise their heads first to take a breath.

2. SCUBA Diving

This technique is carried out at sea depths of around 18-39 m or less, depending on the needs and speed of the ocean currents. It is usually carried out for the purpose of searching for objects under the sea, research, observing the growth of marine life, and light ship repairs. Not infrequently, this technique is also used in underwater tourism objects, especially in an effort to attract visitors.

All SCUBA divers must first master the ESA (Emergency Swimming Ascent) technique, which is free swimming to the surface quickly while exhaling. In addition, to carry out this technique must also be accompanied by a professional.

3. SSBA (Surface Supply Breathing Apparatus Diving) Diving

This SSBA dive must use more sophisticated and complex equipment, right… Apart from that, the dive motion is also difficult to do. Usually, it is done to conduct research under the sea with a depth of 60 meters which takes about 40 minutes.

Types of Diving

In fact, this diving alias diving activity has many types. Some are for sports, research, to national defense and security purposes. So here is a description of the types of diving.

Based on the Use of the Tool and the Place

1. Free Diving

As the name implies, this type of diving is done freely without using any special breathing apparatus. For the use of the tool, it is only limited to frog legs and masks. However, even though it is called freediving, that doesn’t mean that everyone can do it, right… Only those who already have a certificate. If Sinaumed’s doesn’t have any diving certificate yet, but still wants to try the sensation of free diving , it’s okay to do it as long as it’s accompanied by a special instructor to keep it safe.

2. Night Diving

As the name implies, this type of diving is only done at night. Some people really like underwater views, especially at night. It will indeed look darker, but instead glowing animals will come out at this time, for example, there are jellyfish, anthias fish, and firefly squid.

Of course, the equipment must be complete , starting from masks, frog legs, breathing tubes, to water flashlights.

3.Drift Diving

This third type of diving is diving by following the flowing ocean currents, so that a little body energy is expended because it will let the body be carried away by the currents of sea water. The sensation is almost the same as if you are flying in the air!

There is one thing that needs to be done before doing this drift diving, namely checking the ocean currents and waves around it.

4. Cave Diving

As the name implies, this type of diving will be carried out in a cave. Yep, under the sea it doesn’t only contain marine life, but there is also a cave that turns out to attract the attention of many tourists. However, to do this cave diving, special skills are needed. This is because caves have limited space to move, compared to the open ocean. Plus, on our right and left sides there will be stalactites, new ones, and sharp corals.

5. Ice Diving

The next type of diving is ice diving which of course is done in ice. So, for this type of ice diving, it has procedures and methods that are slightly different from other types of diving. The ice in question is a lake or part of the sea that freezes into ice. Before diving into the ice (usually done in winter), we must first make a hole in the ice with a chainsaw as a way to enter. Well, after being perforated, it doesn’t mean that we can just go in. It is necessary to check the temperature of the water, then attach a special harness kit for diving.

This type of diving includes those that have a high risk, because the part of the water that is covered by ice is of course very cold and can make the body experience hypothermia.

Based on Purpose

1. For the Interests of State Defense and Security

• Tactical (Combat) Diving, namely diving that is carried out for combat tasks.
• Submarine Rescue, diving using a submarine for rescue purposes.
• Search & Rescue (SAR)
• Inspection & Repair
• Ship Salvage

2. For Commercial Purposes

Namely the type of diving that is carried out professionally for the benefit of underwater construction. For example: offshore mining (Offshore Driving).

3. For Scientific Interests ( Scientific Driving )

Namely the type of dives carried out for scientific purposes. For example: biology, geology, archeology, and marine research.

4. For Sports

That is the type of diving that is done for the sake of sports or to improve the condition of health and fitness of mind and body. Diving for the purpose of this sport must use adequate equipment.

• Skin Diving : diving that is carried out using basic diving equipment, such as masks, snorkels and fins.
• Scuba Diving : diving that is done with scuba equipment.

Diving Basic Equipment

Previously, it has been explained several times briefly that this diving activity requires adequate equipment to support safety, especially for beginners. Well, some of the basic equipment can be:

1. Masks

This mask, aka mask, is basic equipment in diving which is useful for covering part of the face, especially the eyes and nose. It should also be understood that the size of the mask must fit and be comfortable to wear. Other functions namely:

• To create an air pocket between the diver’s eyes and the water, thus allowing the diver to see well underwater.
• Prevent water from entering the nose and eyes, as well as anticipating irritation.

2. Snorkels

That is a diving tool that is usually used by skin or scuba divers. Functions can be:

• Help divers swim without having to use air from a scuba tube.
• Help the diver breathe without having to lift his head.
• Allows divers to see underwater scenery properly.

3. Fins

In Indonesia, this diving equipment is called frog legs, which are indeed created to provide strength to the legs as propulsion. These fins are indeed not made to increase speed, but only increase pedaling power on the legs. There are 3 types of fins, namely:

• Foot Pocket , which is usually used for skin diving activities. The shape is more flexible with the location of the plates more angled so that the feet don’t get tired easily.
• Open Heel , usually used for scuba diving activities. The shape is straight and semi-rigid. Even so, it can actually provide greater strength, but still requires adjustment time for the leg muscles.
• Adjustable Open Heel , usually used for scuba diving with large pockets for feet wearing boots. There are larger plates, so the power is also greater.

4. Boots

Namely equipment in the form of foot protectors. This tool is mandatory for use, especially in rocky areas so that it will minimize leg cramps due to cold or foot blisters. Boots must also fit properly on the feet so that diving activities continue to run safely.

5. Wet Suits

Namely diver’s protective clothing made of neoprene rubber and aerated foam bubbles. This suit of course will not absorb water and serves to protect divers from coral scratches and body heat under the surface of the water.

6. Weight belts

Apart from clothing, there are also special belts used in diving activities to regulate buoyancy. There are specific guidelines to make it easier for divers to determine the weight of the belt against body weight.

The Difference Between Diving and Snorkeling

Many people think that diving is the same as snorkeling. Even though the two are different , you know , even though they are both underwater. So, what are the differences? Come on, see the following reviews!

diving	Snorkeling
Performed in water depths of up to 300 meters, requiring oxygen cylinders for breathing apparatus.	Done at a depth of 1-3 meters, so it does not require oxygen cylinders. If you want to breathe, immediately raise your head to inhale oxygen from the surface of the water.
Using special techniques, even have to have a special certificate.	It doesn’t require any special technique, the most important thing is being able to swim well.
In his breathing exercises, including breathing in oxygen from a tube.	In practice, breathe through your mouth, not your nose.
More tools are used, ranging from masks, snorkels, oxygen cylinders, fins, boots, to clothes and special belts.	The tools used are only 3 namely mask, snorkel, and frog legs.
It has various goals, ranging from scientific goals, rescue goals, work goals (profession), to recreation.	The goal is for recreation and exploring underwater life.

So, that’s a review of what diving is and its basic techniques, types, and differences from snorkeling. Is Sinaumed’s interested in doing this diving activity and enjoying the underwater panorama full of marine life?

Source:

Hadi, Nurachmad. (1991). Overview of Diving. Oceana, Vol XVI (4). 

Also Read!

• Why does seawater taste salty?

• 10 Benefits of Coral Reefs for Marine Life and Humans

• What is the process of making salt until it’s ready to eat?

• 16 Impacts of Climate Change to Watch Out For

• 5 Facts about the Mariana Trench and its inhabitants

• How Do Fish Sleep?

The division of time in Indonesia is divided into 3. However, before getting there we must first know how the process is. This article will discuss how time is divided in Indonesia. It will also discuss the history of time division in Indonesia.

How is the division of time in Indonesia?

In one day, the sun will rotate for 23 hours 56 minutes. As we know, the sun will rotate on its axis. The 23 hours 56 minutes is then rounded up to 24 hours.

That rotation will cause the sun to be different in the position of the celestial sphere. The sun will form a complete circle. One complete circle equals 360 degrees.

The circle will be traveled for 24 hours by the sun. If you look at the time for 1 hour, it is equal to 15 degrees. Then, each length of longitude is 15 degrees.

It is then assigned a separate time zone. The time zone is determined by the formula GMT + time in that area. To find out how time is divided in Indonesia, you need to look at its astronomical location.

Based on its astronomical location, the territory of Indonesia is located between coordinates 95 degrees to 141 degrees east longitude. Indonesia is located at 6 degrees north latitude to 11 degrees south latitude. Looking at the location of longitude, the length of Indonesia’s longitude is 46 degrees.

In one hour, the sun rotates on its axis by 15 degrees. Therefore, the territory of Indonesia as seen from the tip or Sabang to the east or Merauke has a time difference of about 3 hours. In addition, because Indonesia is to the east of the city of Greenwich.

This means that the sun will rise first. Therefore, the territory of Indonesia will be earlier than the city of Greenwich. Longitude is one of the factors that becomes the reason for calculating the time division in Indonesia.

For the easternmost country of Indonesia, the time calculation will be based on 135 degrees longitude. That makes the time difference about 9 hours earlier than the city of Greenwich. In the central part of Indonesia, the time calculation will be based on 120 degrees longitude.

Central Indonesia has a time difference of about 8 hours earlier than the city of Greenwich. For western Indonesia, the time calculation will be based on 105 degrees longitude. This makes western Indonesia have a time difference of about 7 hours earlier than the city of Greenwich.

In addition to its astronomical location, the influence of time division is also due to climatic conditions. Given that the country of Indonesia is at a latitude of 23.5 degrees North Latitude and South Latitude. Therefore, the territory of Indonesia is influenced by a tropical climate.

The tropical climate in the territory of Indonesia certainly has consequences or consequences. One of them is on the reception of sunlight throughout the year. Indonesia will receive sunlight with a relatively maximum heat intensity.

Therefore, in dividing the time, the Indonesian state is divided into 3 periods. These times are WIT, WITA and WIB. Here is the explanation:

1. WIT (East Indonesia Time)

The time in eastern Indonesia is called WIT (eastern Indonesia time). The time zone in this region extends along the east longitude of about 135 degrees. This stretch of longitude covers some of the easternmost parts of Indonesia.

The area includes the islands of Maluku and Papua. The time zone for this eastern part of Indonesia can be determined through a formula. The formula is UTC + 9 or GMT + 9.

The provinces on the islands of Maluku and Papua which follow eastern Indonesian time are as follows:

a. Maluku Island

•   Maluku
•   North Maluku

b. Papuan

•   Papuan
•   West Papua

2. WITA (Central Indonesian Time)

The time in the central part of Indonesia is called WITA. The region’s time zone extends along the east longitude of 120 degrees. The time division in central Indonesia is the same as the international time division.

The time zone for this central part of Indonesia can be determined through a formula. The formula is UTC + 8 or GMT + 8. The stretch of longitude in this region includes several areas in Indonesia.

The area is the entire island of Bali, Nusa Tenggara, Sulawesi and Kalimantan Island. Provinces included in Central Indonesian Time are as follows:

a. Kalimantan island

•   North Kalimantan
•   East Kalimantan
•   South Kalimantan

b. Bali Island

•   Bali
•   East Nusa Tenggara
•   West Nusa Tenggara

c. Sulawesi island

•   West Sulawesi
•   Central Sulawesi
•   South Sulawesi
•   North Sulawesi
•   Gorontalo

3. WIB (Western Indonesian Time)

The time in western Indonesia is called WIB. The time zone of this western region extends along the east longitude of 105 degrees. The time zone for the western part of Indonesia can be determined through a formula.

The formula is UTC + 7 or GMT + 7. The stretch of longitude in this region includes several areas in Indonesia. Like all areas on the islands of Java, Madura, Sumatra and Kalimantan (west and center). Provinces included in western Indonesian time are as follows:

a. Sumatera island

•   aceh
•   North Sumatra
•   West Sumatra
•   South Sumatra
•   Jambi
•   Riau Archipelago (Kepri)
•   Riau
•   Bengkulu
•   Bangka Belitung
•   Lampung

b. Java Island

•   East Java
•   Central Java
•   West Java
•   Banten
•   In Yogyakarta
•   DKI Jakarta

c. Kalimantan island

•   West Kalimantan
•   Central Kalimantan

History of Time Division in Indonesia

The Governments Besluit rules came into force on May 1, 1908. At that time, the Central Java region was designated as a zodiac or time zone. Central Java Region with GMT + 7:12.

Then a change occurred in 1918, in February to be precise. At that time, the Dutch determined that the Padang region had a time difference from Central Java. The Netherlands set the Padang area less than 39 minutes from the time in the Central Java region.

The Netherlands also decided the time in the Balikpapan area. In the city of Balikpapan, the time is earlier than GMT, which is + 8:20. It didn’t end there, the rules regarding this time were again changed.

The change occurred in 1924. The time change was made by Hoofden van Gewestelijk Bestuur in de Buitengewesten. He is a regional ruler.

In this change, it is determined that the time in the Central Java region has changed. It changes to GMT+7:20. Meanwhile, the Bali and Lombok Residency areas are around + 22 minutes from the time in the Central Java region.

The time in the Makassar region also has +38 minutes from the time in the Central Java region. Meanwhile, the time in the Tapanuli area is less than 45 minutes from the time in the Central Java region. The time in the Padang area is also set at 7 minutes less than the time in the Central Java region.

The Netherlands then again changed the time zone in Indonesia. Changes occurred in 1932. The Dutch divided Indonesia’s time into 6 regions. The six regions have a time difference of about 30 minutes.

For the sake of the military interests of the Japanese government, the time in Indonesia was changed again. This happened in 1942. The changes made were adjusted to the time in Tokyo. It is known that the time in Tokyo is GMT + 9. Therefore, the time zone in the Java region is advanced to GMT + 7:30 or 1:30.

Since the Dutch state came to power again in Indonesia, the time zone has been changed again. Changes occur for reasons of military operations. The change was made on December 10, 1947.

At that time, the time zone in Indonesia was divided into 3 time zones. Those times are +7 at 105 degrees longitude, +8 at 120 degrees longitude, and +9 at 135 degrees longitude. It doesn’t end there, the time zone is changed again.

Changes occur at the time of transfer of sovereignty. This change was made by the Indonesian government. At that time, the time zone in Indonesia was officially divided into 6 time zones.

This division is based on the governor general’s decision. This decision occurred in 1932. When the Dutch succeeded in recapturing Irian Jaya, the Indonesian government again changed its time division.

In 1963, the Indonesian government formalized the Decree of the President of the Republic of Indonesia No. 243 of 1963. The core content of the decision was that the president again divided the territory of Indonesia into three times.

The last change regarding the time zone occurred after the Presidential Decree or Presidential Decree No. 41 of 1987 came into effect. The core content of the presidential decree is that the territory of Indonesia is divided into 3 time zones.

The three time zones are WIT (East Indonesia Time), WITA (Central Indonesia Time) and WIB (Western Indonesia Time).

The State of Indonesia also sets time based on GMT or Green Mean Time. Based on the GMT rules, the time zone in Indonesia is divided into 3 parts. This decision is in effect to date.

That is an explanation of the division of time in Indonesia. Find other interesting information at www.sinaumedia.com . sinaumedia as #FriendsWithoutLimits always presents interesting articles and recommendations for the best books for Sinaumed’s,

Author: Wida Kurniasih

Source: from various sources

• Definition of Geography, Aspects, & Objects of Study of Geography
• The Solar System: Definition, Theory, and the Composing System
• 10 Geography Concepts You Need to Learn
• 4 Principles of Geography, Examples, Objects, & Approaches
• 5 Reasons Indonesia is Called a Maritime Country

Distribution of Inheritance in Islam – The religion of Islam is a perfect religion because every matter both concerning worldly affairs and the hereafter has been arranged in such a good way. And, in the Islamic religion upholds the value of justice so that unnecessary disputes and jealousy do not occur, especially towards fellow family members. There is no exception for matters of inheritance in Islam which have been arranged as well as possible so that everyone gets their share equally and fairly.

Wills and inheritance are quite sensitive matters discussed. Because this is related to matters of money and inheritance, which each feels entitled to get. Recently, however, every household has no longer hesitated to apply for inheritance distribution according to Indonesian Islamic law.

More and more people are implementing Islamic Heritage Law in Indonesia. Most of Indonesia’s population is Muslim. In addition, the application of Islamic inheritance law in Indonesia is based on Islamic law, namely the Hadith and Al-Quran, so that people can easily understand it. May humans have faith in Islamic laws that govern their lives to achieve happiness in the world and the hereafter.

For this reason, for Sinaumed’s friends who are Muslim and want to understand more about the science of Islamic inheritance distribution, in this discussion, we have summarized various information related to Islamic inheritance distribution that Sinaumed’s friends can understand and apply later to the family of all Sinaumed’s friends.

Furthermore, we have presented the discussion and can be listened to below!

What is meant by the law of inheritance in Islam?

Inheritance in the sense of Islamic inheritance law is a rule that is stipulated to regulate the transfer or transfer of assets from a deceased person to a person or family, also known as heirs.

Whereas in the preparation of the book of Islamic laws, article 171 explains inheritance rights, which means “Islamic inheritance law is a law designed to regulate the transfer of property rights to heirs of property and determine who has the right to receive and become heirs as well as the number of shares owned by each heir.

For this reason, in Islamic inheritance law there are also rules for determining who is the heir, the number of shares owned by each heir, the type of property to be inherited, or the inheritance to be received by the heirs.

Indonesian Islamic Inheritance Law

In the rules of Islamic inheritance, it does not only discuss the distribution of assets left by the heir. However, there is also a budget related to the transfer of assets left by the heir because he has died. In transferring assets according to the heir to the heir, it turns out that there is still a neat way, namely through a will.

Talking about Islamic inheritance rules which are based on the verses of the Al-Qur’an, matters regarding wills are also found in the Al-Qur’an and also in Indonesian Islamic law. Here are some of those rules:

In surah Al-Baqarah in verse 180, it is explained that a will is an obligation for those who fear Allah SWT. Seeing according to the verse, the understanding according to the will itself is a statement of desire regarding the heir’s assets after his death, which is done before the death.

Not only in surah Al-Baqarah, matters regarding wills are also stated in surah An-Nisa in verses 11-12. In the verse of surah An-Nisa, it is stated that in the Islamic inheritance rules the position of a will is very crucial as a result it must take precedence before distributing the assets left by the heir to his heirs.

Islamic inheritance law in Indonesia is also regulated in the KHI (Compilation of Islamic Law) according to Presidential Instruction No. 1 of 1991. Where KHI is a Legislation concerning matters of Waqf, Marriage, including matters of inheritance. KHI itself is based on the Qur’an and the hadith of the Prophet, which will be used specifically by the Religious Courts to carry out their duties in dealing with family conflicts in Islamic communities in Indonesia.

KHI contains 3 books, each of which is divided into several chapters and chapters. For the field of Islamic inheritance rules, there is still book II KHI entitled “Inheritance Law”. The KHI book in the field of Islamic inheritance rules consists of 6 Chapters & 44 Articles. The details according to book II of KHI are as follows:

• Chapter 1 : General Provisions (Article 171)
• Chapter 2 : Heir (Article 172 – Article 175)
• Chapter 3 : Amount of Inheritance (Article 176 – Article 191)
• Chapter 4 : Aul & Rad (Article 192 – Article 193)
• Chapter 5 : Will (Article 194 – Article 209)
• Chapter 6 : Inheritance Gifts(Article 210 – Article 214)

For matters governing wills in KHI, they are still in Chapter V to be precise in articles 194 to 209. The contents are around, for example:

Articles 194 to 208 in the KHI Islamic inheritance rules regulate the use of an ordinary will. Whereas in article 209, it regulates more regarding specific wills given to adoptive parents or adopted children.
Article 195 of the KHI Islamic inheritance rules, states that there are still 2 forms of wills, namely express & written (either in the form of private deed or notarial deed). These two forms of wills are believed to be valid if witnessed by at least 2 witnesses.

Procedures for Distribution of Inheritance in Islam

Quoting from a book entitled “Division of Islamic Inheritance” by Muhammad Ali Ash-Shabuni, the procedure for dividing inheritance according to Surah Al-Quran An-Nisa is that the ratio includes half (1/2), a quarter (1/4), one eighth (1/8 ), two thirds (2/3), one third (1/3) and one sixth (1/6) .

1. Half (1/2)

Ashhabul furudh gets half (1/2) is a group of men and four women. This includes husbands, daughters, nephews, siblings, and paternal sisters

2. A quarter (1/4)

The heirs are entitled to a quarter of the inheritance of an heir who only has two husbands and wives.

3. One-eighth (1/8)

The heir to one-eighth of the inheritance is his wife. A wife inherits her husband’s property, whether he has children or grandchildren from her womb or from another wife’s womb.

4. Two-thirds (2/3)

The heirs of two-thirds of the assets are four women. These heirs include biological daughters, nephews, biological sisters and biological sisters.

5. One third (1/3)

Only two of the heirs to a third of the estate are the mother and two siblings from the same mother.

6. One sixth (1/6)

There are 7 heirs who are entitled to one-sixth of the inheritance as father, grandfather, mother, grandson, son, biological sister of father, grandmother, brother and mother. older sister.

Certain Things Make Someone’s Inheritance Void

In Islamic law, there are certain things that make a person’s inheritance null and void. Among them:

1. Slaves

A person who is a slave is not entitled to inherit even from his brother. Because everything that belongs to a slave belongs directly to his master.

2. Murder

Heirs who kill an heir (eg a son kills his father) are not entitled to the inheritance. This is based on the words of Rasulullah SAW:

“No murderer has the right to inherit the property of the person he kills.”

3. Religious Differences

Conditions for heirs to receive inheritance according to Islamic inheritance law

According to Islamic Inheritance Law, based on Article 174 of the Islamic Law Book, the group of male heirs includes fathers, sons, brothers, uncles, aunts and grandfathers. So mothers, daughters, sisters and grandmothers form a group of heirs.

Considering that the heirs by marriage are widows and widowers. If all groups of heirs are still alive, then the inheritance belongs to the children, father, mother, wife and husband.

The first condition for inheritance is that the heir has died and the person’s death can be determined without proof (essentially dead) or by decree (died by law). Second, whether the heir is still alive or the judge’s decision stated that he was still alive at the time of death of the legal heir.

Even if the legal heir is still in his mother’s womb, he is still entitled to his share if he can prove that he is the heir. However, there are also limitations that make inheritance impossible. For example, religious differences between heirs and heirs, slavery and murder.

Pillars of Receiving Inheritance in Islam

As is the case with other things, inheritance also has a number of pillars that must be respected. Because if one of these pillars is not met, then the inheritance cannot be divided among the heirs. To avoid this, here are some pillars of inheritance based on Islamic inheritance law.

In Islamic inheritance law fiqh, there are three pillars of inheritance that must be met before the distribution of inheritance. The three pillars are:

1. Al-muwarrits

Heirs alias al-muwarrits are corpses that are passed on to other people who have inheritance rights.

2. Al-wârits

Heirs or al-wârits are people who have a family relationship with the deceased and for other reasons stipulate that he has the right to inherit property.

3. Al-mauruts

Inheritance or al-maurûts is an inheritance which is actually inherited by a person who has died to his closest family.

People who leave inheritance or heirs are people who have died. While the heir or heir is someone who has a family relationship with the heir because of the underlying reasons that we have explained earlier. Inheritance is property left by heirs and wants to be passed on to their families.

Total Part of Inheritance Obtained Based on Islamic Inheritance Law

1. Distribution of Inheritance to Father

Islamic inheritance law stipulates that the father plays an important role in the division of inheritance. If the crown prince’s father receives one-third of the inheritance left by the crown prince (his son). However, these conditions apply when dividing assets if you don’t have children. If the heir has children, the father’s share is reduced by about one sixth.

2. Distribution of inheritance to the mother

The heir’s mother is also entitled to the inheritance. Under Islamic inheritance law, a mother receives one-third of her inheritance from her heirs if she has no children. If I have children, I only have the sixth. But that’s true when mom isn’t with dad. If they stay together, the mother only receives one third of the rights of the wife or widow.

3. Distribution of inheritance to sons

According to Islamic inheritance law, the son’s share is greater than that of the crown prince’s daughter, that is, twice as much. But if the son is an only child, then his share is half of the crown prince’s (father’s) inheritance.

4. Distribution of inheritance to daughters

The distribution of inheritance to daughters according to Islam can be seen from the status of daughters. If the daughter is an only child, she will receive half. However, if you have 2 or more daughters then you will get 2/3 share.

According to Islamic inheritance law, if the heir has a daughter and a son, then the son will receive twice the amount of each daughter. For example, a family with an inheritance of IDR 15 billion is divided between 3 girls and 1 boy. So, every girl gets IDR 3 billion and boys IDR 6 billion.

5. Distribution of Inheritance to Wives or Widows

The division of inheritance when a man dies on behalf of his wife or a Muslim widow is the wife or widow who receives half of the property for the husband. More than half of the joint property (husband) is divided equally between the wife or widow and their children. However, according to Islamic inheritance law, after the husband dies, if the husband has no children, the wife or widow will receive a quarter of the share. But if the man has children, his wife or widow will receive the eighth.

6. Inheritance of Assets According to Islamic Law

Conclusion

So a brief discussion of the division of inheritance in Islam. Not only understanding the meaning of inheritance distribution in Islam, but also knowing the meaning of Islamic inheritance law, laws governing Islamic inheritance law, distribution procedures, terms, pillars and the number of shares of inheritance obtained based on Islamic inheritance law.

Knowing what inheritance is based on Islamic inheritance law gives us new knowledge about inheritance issues which are actually quite sensitive in its application. By knowing this, we can better understand how to do it so as to prevent families from unnecessary conflicts around inheritance distribution.

This is a review of what Islamic inheritance is all about. For Sinaumed’s who want to understand Islamic inheritance distribution and knowledge related to other inheritance laws, you can visit sinaumedia.com to get related books.

As #FriendsWithoutLimits, sinaumedia always provides the best products, so you have the best and latest information for you. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Author: Pandu Akram
Related Articles:

Understanding Islamic Inheritance Law: Conditions, Pillars, and How to Share It Fairly

Examples of Customary Law and Sanctions Existing in Indonesia

Understanding the Definition of Customary Law and Examples in Indonesia

Law: Definition, Purpose, Function, Elements and Types

Understanding the Law of Endowment of Assets to the Pillars of Waqf

 

Discoverer of the Australian Continent – ​​Long before James Cook was named the discoverer of the Australian Continent, 70 years earlier sailors from Makassar, Indonesia had already set foot on the continent. As we all know that the continent of Australia is the smallest continent in the world which is located in the southern part of Indonesia.

In 1770, the Australian continent was discovered by a sailor from England named James Cook. Therefore, Australia is now under the rule of the British Empire. While the original inhabitants of the Australian continent are Aborigines who are physically almost similar to the tribes on the mainland of New Guinea. But keep in mind that the discoverer of the Australian continent is not James Cook.

History of Discovering the Continent of Australia

About 70 years before James Cook set foot on the Australian continent and claimed to be the one who discovered the continent. There were sailors from Makassar Indonesia who came first and set foot on the Australian continent. In fact, the sailor from Indonesia has long collaborated with the Aborigines.

This opinion was expressed in a scientific paper written by Horst Hubertus Liebner, a maritime anthropologist from Germany. These sailors from Makassar sailed from Sulawesi to the north coast of Australia using Padevakang. It was an ancient type of wooden boat that had been extinct since a century ago. Then Padewakang evolved into a pinisi boat that we know today. The boat moves using wind power captured by the sails above the boat. Therefore, the sailing period is also adjusted to the movement of the east or west monsoons.

In the past, during the west monsoon season, many Padevakang fleets originating from Makassar anchored off the northern coast of Australia. Then the sailors would stay for months in search of sea cucumbers. After that, they will process the results of their search on land with the local Aborigines.

About six months later, during the east monsoon season, the Padevakang fleet anchored in Australia will return to Sulawesi with sea products in the form of dried sea cucumbers. Sometimes some of the Aborigines join them on the way back to Makassar. The sailors’ voyage ended in 1907. This was because they were banned by the Dutch East Indies colonial government, which at that time controlled parts of Indonesia. Even so, the long-standing relationship between the Makassar people and the Aborigines has left a very deep impression on both of them.

Australian historian Peter G. Spillet also revealed that around the 1500s, there was a phase of cultural interaction between Muslims from Makassar and the Aborigines, in addition to the trade relations they established. Evidence of this culture is also found in the vocabulary used by modern Aborigines, who until now still use 250 terms absorbed from English. Apart from language, other evidence that further strengthens this is the names given by several people in several areas of Makassar such as Kayu Jawa which is located on the Kimberley Beach and also Teluk Mangko which is in the North West Bay of Australia. Another study was conducted by an anthropologist from Monash University named John Bradley.

In his research, Bradley revealed that the interaction carried out by the Makassar people and the Aborigines was the first international relationship for the Aborigines themselves. Where the relationship occurred 70 years ago before the arrival of James Cook and his friends on the Australian continent. That means, sailors from Makassar indeed became the discoverers of the Australian Continent because they first came to the continent. Bradley said, Muslims from Makassar and people from the Aborigines traded more fairly together. There are no racial judgments and no racial policies. Apart from that, Bradley also compared the arrival of sailors from Makassar who were considered very different from the arrival of James Cook.

As people of white origin, the British claimed that Australia was one of the continents that belonged to no one or Terra Nullius. That means indirectly, the British through James Cook have colonized and claimed unilaterally the Australian continent as their own without the approval of the Aborigines. On the other hand, seafarers from Indonesia have left more historical records. Starting from trade relations, traditions, culture, and other history that we can see until now. Because of the close relationship between Indonesian sailors and the Aborigines, the history of their togetherness is still celebrated by the Aboriginal community in Northern Australia.

The sea cucumber trade carried out by the Makassar people and the Aborigines finally ended in 1906 as explained above. This is the result of exorbitant taxes and government policies regarding the prohibition of buying and selling activities of non-white people.

What Is the Continent of Australia?

The continent of Australia is located in the southern region of Indonesia and has an area of ​​around 8,945.00 km2. Because the continent was claimed to have been discovered by James Cook who came from England, the area eventually became a commonwealth of British territories. In geology, the Australian Continent or commonly referred to as Sahul, Greater Australia, Australia New Guinea, Meganesia, Australasia, or Australinea is a continent consisting of mainland Australia, New Guinea, and Tasmania.

The continent of Australia is the smallest continent in the world. The largest city of the country is Sydney. However, the capital city of the country is located in Canberra. Indigenous Australians mostly use English as their official language. Because as previously explained that the Australian Continent is one of the British Commonwealth countries. According to history, the Australian continent was originally inhabited by people from the Aborigines, which is one of the races of the Polynesian peoples. However, after the exploration and expansion of the Europeans in discovering the New World. Therefore, the Australian Continent became one of the British colonies and made it a country that entered the Commonwealth of Nations, along with other countries such as Malaysia, South Africa, Hong Kong,

After the conquest of the Australian Continent, the British then made the continent a land of disposal for suspected crimes or convicts who were considered to be troubling British society. Not only that, the dissidents of the British empire were also banished to the continent. Then, the Australian Continent became a place for European races besides the Aborigines. The government of the Australian state still follows the British empire with the Queen as the symbol of its government and adheres to a constitutional monarchy system.

Astronomical Location of the Australian Continent

If based on astronomical latitude, the continent of Australia is at 10 degrees south latitude – 44 degrees south latitude and 113 degrees east longitude – 154 degrees east longitude. The astronomical location of the Australian continent is in the southern hemisphere and most of the continent’s borders are surrounded by oceans and also the seas that surround them. The continent of Australia has an area of ​​around 7,686,850 square kilometers. Meanwhile, the total population living on the continent is 35 million. The Australian continent includes mainland Australia, islands in Papua New Guinea, and also the small islands around it.

Geographical Location of Australia

When viewed geographically, there are only three countries on the continent of Australia, namely Australia itself, Papua New Guinea, and parts of Indonesia. Even so, if you count the countries in the Oceania region, then for the total number of countries, there are 14 countries. Here is a full explanation:

a. The north side is directly adjacent to Indonesian territory, namely the Timor Sea and the Arafuru Sea.
b. While in the south it is directly adjacent to the Antarctic Ocean and the Indian Ocean.
c. While in the south it is bordered by the Indian Ocean.
d. And to the east it is directly adjacent to the Tasmanian Sea, Coral Sea and the Pacific Ocean.

Geological Location of the Australian Continent

From a geological perspective, the continent of Australia is located in the Eastern Hemisphere and the Southern Hemisphere. It is this location that makes the Australian Continent often referred to as the lower continent. For nature in Australia itself is divided into three parts. The following is a complete explanation of the geological location of the Australian Continent:

a. The area in eastern Australia is filled with mountain ranges that extend from Cape York in the north to the island of Tasmania.
b. The area in the western part of Australia is filled with a plateau which is usually called the Australian Shield. The majority of the western and central regions are desert, namely the Gibson Desert and the Victoria Desert.
c. Meanwhile, midway between the eastern mountains and the western highlands are the Murray Darling valley and the lowland of Lake Eyre. The lake is also one of the largest lakes in Australia.

Here are some of the states in Australia

1. New South Wales (801,600 km2)
Capital: Sydney
2. Victoria (227,600 km2)
Capital: Melbourne
3. Queensland (1,727,200 km2)
Capital: Brisbane
4. Western Australia (2,525,500 km2)
Capital: Perth
5. South Australia (984,000 km2)
Capital: Adelaide
6. Tasmania (67,800 km2)
Capital: Hobart
7. Northern Australia (1,346,200 km2)
Capital: Darwin
8. Australian Capital Territory (2,400 km2)
Capital : Canberra

Climate Conditions on the Australian Continent

When viewed from its latitude, Australia has three climate regions. Here is the explanation:

a. Tropical Climate: Northern Australia is located at 10′ S-35′ S
b. Subtropical Climate: Section of South Australia is located at 23′ S-35′ S
c. Temperate Climate: Southern Victoria and Tasmania, located at 35′ S-35′ S

The climate that exists in the Australian region is also influenced by ocean currents and also sea distance and landscape. Around the north, west and east coast areas have relatively warm temperatures. Because, it is affected by the flow of heat currents. While along the south coast and also Tasmania, the air temperature is relatively cold. It could happen as a result of the flow of cold currents. Generally, areas located near the coast must have more humid air. As for the area in the middle of Australia and far from the sea, the area will be desert and have very dry air.

Population on the Australian Continent

If based on its history, the continent of Australia is inhabited by the original Aborigines. However, over time and the times, the continent began to be inhabited by other tribes and nations. According to population data for 2003, the population of Australia is around 19.9 million people with a population growth of around 0.6 percent annually. The tribes that inhabit the continent include European Ethnic or white race, Asian or yellow skin race, and Aborigines or Polynesian and Melanesian races.

A Growing Industrial Sector on the Australian Continent

The Australian continent has a wide variety of diverse industrial sectors. The industrial sector includes agriculture with products such as wheat, cotton, rice, sugar cane, fruits, and also corn. Then also livestock products including dairy cattle, sheep, meat. Not only that, there are other industrial sectors including mining which includes iron ore, gold mining, petroleum, and also aluminum. Then heavy industry includes the dairy industry, wool, sugar, textiles, machinery, electronics, iron, steel, as well as oil refining.

Australian System of Government

Australia has an official name, namely The Commonwealth of Australia with the capital city in Canberra. The form of the country is a constitutional monarchy with the head of state in the form of the Queen and the head of government, namely the Prime Minister. The official language used by the majority of Australians is English with the majority being Christian. While the currency used is the Australian Dollar and has a national anthem entitled God Save the Queen. The following are some of the characteristics of the Australian Continent that you need to know:

a. The continent of Australia is included in the smallest continent in the world compared to the area of ​​other continents
b. The continent is only inhabited by one country, in contrast to other continents which can be inhabited by several countries
c. The continent of Australia is the second continent which is located in the southern part of the continent of Antarctica
d. Has typical endemic animals, namely kangaroos, platypus, and kiwi birds
e. The Australian continent is a continent that has indigenous tribes, namely the Aborigines
f. The majority of the continent’s population is of the white race

Australia as a country in the southern hemisphere also cooperates with neighboring countries, one of which is Indonesia. The cooperation carried out by the two covers the fields of export and import, trade, and others. Where Indonesia often imports beef and wool from Australia. In addition, Australia and Indonesia also cooperate in the field of education by providing scholarships through the Australian government to Indonesian students who wish to continue their studies or education in Australia.

Typical Australian Flora and Fauna

As previously explained, the endemic fauna of Australia are the kangaroo, platypus and kiwi bird. As for the unique flora of Australia, namely acacia wood and eucalyptus wood which can be found easily on the continent. The tropical rainforests and temperate forests have lots of large trees and various types of plants. Tropical forests are located in Queensland and also on the coast of eastern Australia and in Tasmania which has a temperate, cool and wet climate.

Those are some explanations about the history of the discovery of the Australian Continent and various interesting facts about the country of Australia. How, is Sinaumed’s interested in visiting the Australian continent?

sinaumedia Literacy – Mitigation is an effort to reduce the impact of environmental damage caused by disasters. There are four ways to deal with disasters, namely mitigation, preparedness, response and normalization. Let’s get to know more closely about Mitigation efforts, see a more complete explanation below, Sinaumed’s!

 

DEFINITION OF DISASTER MITIGATION

There are four important things that need to be considered in disaster mitigation, including the availability of information and maps of disaster-prone areas for each category of disaster, socialization in increasing public understanding and awareness in dealing with disasters, knowing what needs to be done and avoided and how to save yourself if a disaster occurs at any time. -time and arrangement, arrangement of disaster-prone areas to reduce the threat of disaster. Considerations in preparing a Mitigation Program (particularly in Indonesia) include:

• Disaster mitigation must be integrated with the development process
• The focus is not only on disaster mitigation but also on education, food, manpower, housing and even other basic needs.
• Synchronize with local social, cultural and economic conditions
• In the informal sector, the emphasis is on how to increase the community’s capacity to make decisions, help themselves and develop themselves.
• Using local resources (according to decentralization principles)
• Study the development of safe house construction for underprivileged groups of people, as well as options for additional cost subsidies in building houses.
• Learn settlement remodeling techniques (patterns and structures).
• Studying land use to protect people living in disaster-prone areas and losses, both socially, economically, and politically
• It is easy for people to understand and follow.

To help Sinaumed’s understand disaster mitigation, the book Environmental Education and Disaster Mitigation Volume 1 comes in the form of stories, pictures and games that can make learning material more interesting.

TYPES OF DISASTER MITIGATION

The goal of mitigation itself is to reduce losses in the event of a hazard in the future, reduce the risk of death and injury to residents, including reducing damage and economic losses caused to public sector infrastructure. As in the example in the book Rumah Stilts which discusses how the stilt houses are used as disaster mitigation on the Aceh Coast.

Mitigation is divided into 2 types, namely structural mitigation and non-structural mitigation. What is the difference? Here’s the explanation Sinaumed’s!

STRUCTURAL Mitigation

Structural mitigation is an effort to minimize disasters by building various physical infrastructure using technology. For example, by building reservoirs to prevent flooding, making tools for detecting volcanic activity, creating early warning systems to predict tsunami waves, and building disaster-resistant buildings or buildings with structures designed in such a way that they can survive and not endanger the occupants if a disaster occurs at any time. time.

NON STRUCTURAL Mitigation

Non-structural mitigation is an effort to reduce the impact of disasters through policies and regulations. For example, the PB Law or the Disaster Management Law, making urban spatial planning, or other activities that are useful for strengthening the capacity of citizens.

DISASTER Mitigation STRATEGY

Understand that disasters can be predicted naturally and are interrelated with each other so that they need to be evaluated continuously. Disaster mitigation efforts must have the same perception from both government officials and the community. The strategies that can be implemented so that disaster mitigation efforts can be well coordinated are as follows.

MAPPING

Mapping is the most important thing in disaster mitigation, especially for disaster-prone areas. This is because it serves as a reference in making decisions in anticipation of disaster events. Mapping of regional spatial planning is also needed so as not to trigger disaster symptoms. Unfortunately in Indonesia spatial and disaster-prone mapping has not been well integrated, because not all of the areas have been mapped, the maps produced have not been socialized properly, the disaster maps have not been integrated and the disaster maps made use different base maps which makes the integration process difficult.

MONITORING

Monitoring the results of mapping the level of disaster vulnerability in each region will greatly assist in monitoring in terms of predicting the occurrence of disasters. This will facilitate rescue efforts when a disaster occurs. Monitoring can also be carried out for infrastructure development so that it still pays attention to the AMDAL.

SPREAD OF INFORMATION

Information dissemination was carried out, among others, by distributing posters and leaflets to district or city and provincial governments throughout Indonesia that were prone to disasters, regarding procedures for identifying, preventing and managing disasters. The aim is to increase awareness of geological disasters in certain areas. Regional government coordination plays a very important role in the dissemination of this information considering that Indonesia’s territory is very broad.

SOCIALIZATION, COUNSELING, EDUCATION

Some layers of society may not be able to access information about disasters. Therefore, it is the duty of government officials to disseminate information to the community. The counseling materials are almost the same as the dissemination of information. The training focused on evacuation and rescue procedures in the event of a disaster. The aim of the exercise is to put more emphasis on the flow of information from field workers, technical officials and the community to the level of evacuation and rescue of disaster victims. With this training high preparedness against disasters will be formed.

EARLY WARNING

Early warning to report the results of continuous observations in a disaster-prone area, with the aim of making the community more alert. The early warning is disseminated to the public through the local government with the aim of raising public awareness in avoiding disasters. Early warning and the results of monitoring disaster-prone areas in the form of technical advice, diversion of road routes (temporarily or permanently), evacuation and other suggestions for handling.

You can understand these various disaster mitigation strategies through the book Environmental Education and Disaster Mitigation Volume 2 which comes with presentation of material that is packaged in an interesting way.

DISASTER RESPONSE STAGE

The most critical part of implementing mitigation is a full understanding of the nature of the disaster. Within each country and region, the types of hazards encountered will also be different. Some countries are prone to flooding, others have histories of tropical storm damage, and still others are known earthquake zones. Based on the time cycle, disaster management activities can then be divided into 4 categories. Mitigation as the initial stage of natural disaster management to reduce and minimize the impact of disasters, understand the following stages following Sinaumed’s’ explanation:

• Mitigation is an activity before a disaster occurs. Examples of their activities include making maps of disaster-prone areas, building earthquake-resistant buildings, planting mangrove trees, reforesting forests, as well as providing counseling and raising awareness of the people living in these vulnerable areas.
• Preparedness is planning how to respond to disaster events. Planning is made based on disasters that have occurred and other disasters that may occur. The aim is to minimize fatalities and damage to public service facilities. It also includes efforts to reduce the level of risk, manage community resources, and train residents in disaster-prone areas.
• Response, is an effort to minimize the harm caused by the disaster. This stage takes place immediately after a disaster occurs. Disaster management plans are implemented with a focus on relief efforts for disaster victims and anticipation of damage caused by disasters.
• Recovery is an effort to restore the condition of society to its original state. At this stage, the focus is on providing temporary shelter for victims and rebuilding damaged facilities and infrastructure. In addition, an evaluation of the disaster management measures undertaken is carried out.

In Indonesia itself, as an area prone to natural disasters, it has a GIS system or Geographic Information System which is a computer-based system used to analyze various geographic information. You can learn about using the GIS system in disaster mitigation in the GIS Modeling for Disaster Mitigation book.

EXAMPLE OF DISASTER Mitigation

Geologically, Indonesia is located at the confluence of three major world plates, namely the Indo-Australian Plate, the Eurasian Plate and the Pacific Plate. The country we live in is known as the Pacific Ring of Fire. This is a factor in Indonesia where disasters often occur. Disaster itself is defined as an event that can threaten and disrupt people’s lives such as loss of life and property. While Mitigation is a precautionary measure, here are some examples of Sinaumed’s Mitigation:

EXAMPLE OF NATURAL DISASTER MITIGATION

Natural Disasters are events caused by geological factors (movements of the earth’s plates), climatological (weather or climate conditions), and extra-terrestrial (space objects). Examples of Disaster Mitigation Natural disasters, for example, in Landslides. The disaster mitigation that can be done on landslides is as follows.

• Build terraces with proper drainage system
• Make a landslide hazard map
• Making embankments retaining rock debris
• Closure of the fracture on the slope
• Reforestation in a deforested forest
• Do not build buildings on cliffs or on unstable ground
• Pay attention and create an early warning system
• Monitor information on landslide symptoms from electronic media, for example the BMKG website

EXAMPLE OF NON-NATURAL DISASTER MITIGATION

Non-natural disasters or events resulting from epidemics, technological failures, and epidemics. For example, during a disease outbreak, what can be done is:

• Prepare the public at large, including government officials, especially in the health ranks and across related sectors to understand the risks if an outbreak occurs and how to deal with it if an outbreak occurs through continuous outreach activities
• Prepare adequate legal products to support prevention efforts, fast response and handling when an outbreak occurs.
• Preparing infrastructure for handling efforts such as professional human resources, health service facilities, communication facilities, transportation, logistics and operational financing.
• Efforts to strengthen epidemiological surveillance to identify risk factors and determine intervention and treatment strategies as well as early response at all levels.

EXAMPLE OF SOCIAL DISASTER MITIGATION

• Encouraging the participation of all levels of society in order to maintain stability, peace and order
• Supporting the continuity of political democratization with a diversity of political aspirations, as well as instilling moral and ethical political culture based on Pancasila and the 1945 Constitution
• Developing the rule of law by upholding the law consistently, with justice and honesty.
• Increasing understanding and awareness as well as increasing the protection, respect, and enforcement of human rights
• Improving the performance of the state apparatus in the framework of creating a state apparatus that functions to serve the community, professional, efficient, productive, transparent, free from Corruption, Collusion and Nepositism.

Mitigation IN VARIOUS SECTORS

Recognize climate change mitigation, as an effort made to reduce the risk of increasing greenhouse gas emissions. According to the data, the three countries that contribute the most to greenhouse gas emissions are America, China and Indonesia. Predictions regarding the impact of climate change include, in Southeast Asia in 2050 there will be a clean water crisis. In Europe, there will be a heatwave and a very rapid spread of disease. In addition, due to high temperatures there will be drought and crop failure. In Indonesia alone, it is predicted that 45% of agricultural land will be damaged and as many as 2,000 islands will be submerged due to rising sea water. This is also because Indonesia has disaster-prone geographic characteristics.

Mitigation is not only natural disasters, the following is the understanding of Mitigation in other sectors:

FORESTRY SECTOR

One sector that has contributed to the increase in greenhouse gas emissions. This is the result of forest land conversion activities (deforestation), which are accompanied by large-scale forest destruction. One way that has been done to reduce the amount of greenhouse gas emissions in Indonesia is by planting tree seeds. In addition, the government participates in developing Community Forests, Industrial Plantation Forests and Community Forests. In addition, managing water management and maintenance of the reclamation network in swamps.

AGRICULTURE SECTOR

In agriculture, one of the causes contributing to greenhouse gas emissions is burning, fertilizing, weathering, and respiration processes. Therefore mitigation projects for the agricultural sector have a focus on the application of plant cultivation technology, the use of organic fertilizers, the application of bioenergy and compost, as well as the use of biogas and feed technology to help reduce greenhouse gas emissions.

HOUSEHOLD WASTE SECTOR

Reducing greenhouse gas emissions is an essential part of everyday life. For example, waste that has accumulated both organic and inorganic types. Therefore, several ways that have been carried out by the government and the community include improving waste water management in urban areas, applying the 3R technique (Reduce, Reuse and Recycle) in the process of dealing with waste piles, repair and rehabilitation at Final Disposal Sites (TPA), and the utilization of recycled waste into environmentally friendly energy production materials.

AQUATIC SECTOR

Other examples of mitigation efforts in an effort to reduce the impact of climate change on water resources include Weather Modification Technology (TMC) by sowing seeding agents in the form of powder or flare, rehabilitation of reservoirs and ponds, allocation of water through dry pattern reservoir operations, construction of irrigation networks, reforestation of critical lands and socialization of water-saving movements, increasing the reliability of raw water sources, increasing the construction of Water Treatment Plants (IPA), developing appropriate water treatment technologies, building and rehabilitating reservoirs and ponds and building irrigation networks.

TRANSPORTATION SECTOR

Several ways are used to reduce greenhouse gas emissions in the energy and transportation sectors, namely by using cleaner fuels or fuel switching. In addition, participating in optimizing renewable energy which includes wind energy, heat energy, and earth energy. Optimizing the substitute for petroleum and optimizing nuclear energy. In addition, mass transportation is expected to use a low emission and environmentally friendly. The strategy undertaken is to change the pattern of using private vehicles to a low-carbon transportation pattern.

This is an explanation of Disaster Mitigation: Definition, Types, Strategies, Stages and Examples. Hopefully useful Sinaumed’s. Eager to learn!

On the Edutore Youtube Channel, various topics are discussed, ranging from unique general knowledge such as “Why are the brake lights red”, learning English with Captain J, to studying with Edutore which contains discussions of questions such as synonyms, antonyms and other CPNS questions. Check the YouTube account directly, click here

Direct Sentences and Indirect Sentences – When you want to write a short story or other prose framework, does Sinaumed’s ever pay attention to what type of sentences are appropriate to use? Yep, the process of writing is not only about expressing ideas and forms of written language , but also having to consider what sentences are appropriate. In all kinds of sentences, there are direct sentences and indirect sentences. Does Sinaumed’s still remember the Indonesian material?

Direct speech and indirect speech have different forms. In fact, some people often distinguish it from the presence of quotation marks that fill the two types of sentences. Then actually, what are direct sentences and indirect sentences? What are the distinguishing features between the two? What about other types of sentences other than direct and indirect sentences? So, so that Sinaumed’s understands these things, let’s look at the following review!

Direct sentence

Definition of Direct Sentence

Basically, direct speech is a sentence that is directly spoken by a speaker. According to Kosasih (2017), states that direct speech is a sentence that carefully imitates something someone has said. Usually, the quotation section will be in the form of interrogative sentences, declarative sentences, or imperative sentences. Then, Asul Wiyanto (2019) also argues about the definition of direct speech, which is a sentence that tells how what a third person has said is what it is. When these words are written, the original words will be enclosed in double quotation marks.

In direct sentences in the form of news sentences, it will later contain events or events from the source directly. When written down, it will later imitate, quote, or repeat the words of the source, which of course will be enclosed in double quotation marks.

Characteristics of Direct Sentences

In a direct sentence it has the following characteristics:

• In direct sentences, sentences are usually marked with double quotation marks (“….”).
• The first letter in the quoted sentence will be capitalized.
• Excerpts and accompanying sentences are separated by commas (,).
• Direct sentences in the form of sequential dialogue must use a colon (:) in front of the direct sentence.
• In the quotation section, it is common to find interrogative sentences, declarative sentences, and imperative sentences.

Direct Sentence Structure

The structure of writing a direct sentence is usually very simple, in the form of:

1. “[statement uttered by subject]” (,) [verb beginning with lowercase letter] [subject]. 

Example: “Yesterday Arkie did the math group assignment”, said Felix.

2. [Subject] [verb] (,) “[statement made by the subject beginning with a capital letter] [punctuation mark]”

Example: Felix says, “Yesterday Arkie did the math group assignment.”

However, there are several sources which state that the structure of writing a direct sentence is in the form of:

1. companion/quote

Example: Meta says, “Open that window so it doesn’t get hot!”

2. quote/accompaniment

Example: “Let’s go now!” shouted Claire angrily at her friends in the school field.

3. quote/accompany/quote

Example: “Sir, you are asked to come” said Luke, “to the Biology lab room later at 11 o’clock.”

Direct Sentence Examples

• “I will watch the concert today”, said Sabda.
• “Do not move!” the police snapped at the thief.
• Luna said, “Farel will clean the windows the day after tomorrow.”
• “Who hasn’t brought their group assignments today?” asked the teacher before starting math class.
• “Ida, you are called Mrs. Heni”, said Clara, “was told to meet him at the teacher’s office.”

Indirect Sentences

Definition of Indirect Sentences

Basically, this indirect sentence will not use quotation marks. According to Kosasih (2017), indirect sentences are sentences that report something on someone’s speech. The quotation section will be in the form of a news sentence. Then according to Abdul Chaer (2018), indirect sentences are a change from direct sentences, namely those that are not directly spoken by a speaker. The definition of indirect sentences is also stated by Asul Wiyanto (2019), that indirect sentences are sentences that convey the content or intent of the words of a third person. So, in this indirect sentence, don’t imitate directly as it is.

Characteristics of Indirect Sentences

In an indirect sentence, there are the following characteristics:

• Do not use double quotation marks (“….”)
• Intonation seems to level off and decrease at the end of the sentence.
• The actor who states the utterance can change depending on the context of the sentence, namely: the first person pronoun becomes the third person. The second person pronoun becomes the first person.
• Has an assignment word in the form of: so, because, that, for, about, so that, and others.
• In the quotation section, it is usually in the form of a news sentence.

Indirect Sentence Structure

As with direct sentences, this indirect sentence also has its own structure, namely in the form of:

[subject] [predicate] conjunction] [the word spoken by the subject]

Example: Kynan said that yesterday Fara had gone to school

Examples of Indirect Sentences

• Neo told me to open the gate later if a packager comes.
• Mrs. Dewi said that the man who had just passed was her new husband.
• Mother asked Karina to immediately buy salt for her at the next shop.
• The father said that the electricity must be turned off before 10 o’clock at night.
• The doctor told Lisa not to eat spicy food like seblak anymore.

The difference between Direct Sentences and Indirect Sentences

Actually, between direct sentences and indirect sentences, the most striking difference is whether there are double quotation marks (“…”). Direct sentences are in the form of news sentences that contain events or incidents from other sources, by directly imitating, quoting, or repeating the words from that source. Meanwhile, indirect sentences are a variety of news sentences that contain events or events from other sources but the structure has been changed by the speaker, namely by not imitating or saying it directly again.

So, here are some differences between direct speech and indirect speech.

No.	Direct sentence	Indirect Sentences
1.	Words that are quoted or spoken, will be preceded and ended using double quotation marks (“….”)	Do not use double quotation marks (“…”)
2.	The intonation of the quotation has a higher pitch than the accompaniment.	The intonation of reading is flat, not much different between the part of the accompanying sentence and the contents of the sentence being quoted.
3.	The first letter used after double quotation marks (“….”) is capitalized and ends with punctuation according to the type of sentence.	There is a change in pronouns.
4.	The closing double quotation mark (“…”) will be written after the punctuation mark that ends the sentence.	Everything is in the form of news sentences.
5.	Direct sentences in the form of sequential dialogue must use a colon (:) in front of the direct sentence.	Usually there will be the words “that”, “because”, “for”, “so”, “about”, and certain other words that come after the accompanying sentence.

Know Other Sentence Types

Before discussing other types of sentences, it is better if Sinaumed’s understands what sentences are. Basically, a sentence is one of the elements of language in the form of a series of words. In the sentence will usually show the contents of the thoughts of the author in full. The basic pattern of a sentence is Subject + Predicate + Object + Adverb or Complementary. The predicate in a sentence does not have to be a verb or verb, but also nouns and adjectives.

Sentence is the smallest unit of language in spoken or written form that expresses the author’s thoughts as a whole and ends with final intonation, aka dot (.). Sentences are also the basic composition of a discourse. That is, a discourse will only be formed if there are two sentences or more which are located sequentially and are based on discursive rules.

The types of sentences commonly used in a text can be reviewed based on certain things, starting from:

• Predicate type
• Place the predicate
• Completeness of the elements
• Expansion of the elements
• Number of patterns
• The speaking aspect
• The culprit

Types of Sentences According to the Type of the Predicate

1. Verb Sentence

That is a sentence whose predicate is formed from the existence of a verb or verb. Example: Rafa rode his new bicycle this morning.

2. Noun Sentence

That is a sentence whose predicate is formed from a noun or noun phrase. Example: Kynan is a girl .

Types of Sentences According to the Location of the Predicate

1. Normal Sentences

That is a sentence whose subject precedes the predicate. Usually, the sentence pattern in this type of sentence is the basic pattern, namely SPOK. Example: Yudha notes the teacher’s questions.

2. Inversion Sentence

That is a sentence where the predicate comes before the subject. Example: Mr. threw the trash away.

Types of Sentences According to the Completeness of the Elements

1. Minor Sentences

Namely a sentence that consists of only one central element. That is, there is only one word but it is able to show the meaning of the sentence. Example: “Close!”, “Help!”, “Hurry!”.

2. Elliptical Sentence

That is a sentence in which one of the central elements is omitted because the reader must have understood it even though the element is not present. Example: He is going to Jakarta, but I am going to Bandung. – He will go to Jakarta, but I will go to Bandung.

In the second sentence, the word “went” in the clause can be omitted and the meaning will remain the same.

3. Major Sentence

Namely a sentence that contains at least two central elements which consist of a subject and predicate (SP) or can even be more than that, for example given a description (SPOK). Example: Nature (S) will leave (P) tomorrow morning (K)

Types of Sentences Based on the Expansion of the Elements

1. Core Sentence

Actually, this core sentence is a major sentence which only consists of two main elements to become its central element, namely the core element of the subject and the predicate element. The characteristics of the main sentence are as follows:

• Consists of two words.
• Normal intonation.
• Has the usual arrangement.

Example:

The twins, who were born, died after being treated for sixteen days in an incubator.

Key sentence: the child died.

2. Transformational Sentence

Namely a core sentence that has received expansion. Example:

Key sentence: He’s gone

Transformational Sentence:

• He’s leaving
• He will go with me
• He will go with me tomorrow morning

Types of Sentences Based on the Number of Patterns

1. Single Sentence

That is a sentence that only consists of one sentence pattern or one clause only. Sentence patterns in this type are formed by the subject and predicate. However, there are also more complete patterns, namely subject, predicate, object, complement or description. Example: Raka comes home from school.

2. Compound Sentences

Namely a sentence consisting of two sentence patterns or two even more clauses. This compound sentence can usually be formed from the combination of several single sentences. In this type of sentence, it can be classified into three types, namely:

• Equivalent compound sentences, which are connected by equivalent conjunctions.
• Multilevel compound sentences, which are connected by unequal conjunctions.
• Mixed compound sentences, which are connected by equivalent and unequal conjunctions with three or more clauses.

Types of Sentences Based on the Actor

1. Active Voice

That is a sentence whose predicate does a job. The main characteristic of this sentence is that the predicate is a verb starting with me(N) and ber-. Example: Fikri is reading.

2. Passive Sentences

That is a sentence whose subject is imposed by the work. Usually, the predicate in this type of sentence will start with at- or ter-. Example: The ball was kicked by Arkie.

3. Direct and Indirect Sentences

a) Direct Sentences

Namely sentences in the form of news sentences that contain events or incidents from other sources, by directly imitating, quoting, or repeating the words from that source. Example: Adi says, “Collect the picture books today!”

b) Indirect Sentences

Namely a variety of news sentences that contain events or incidents from other sources but the structure has been changed by the speaker, namely by not imitating or saying it again directly. Example: Mr. Agus said that we are all asked to immediately go to the school hall now.

So, that’s a review of what direct and indirect sentences are and the types of sentences that writers usually use in order to express their ideas. Does Sinaumed’s often use these direct and indirect sentences when writing a paper?

Also Read!

• Understanding What Chronological Conjunctions Are and Example Sentences
• Use of Question and Exclamation Marks in Indonesian
• 15+ Examples of Effective Sentences and Their Discussion
• Definition and Types of Compound Sentences
• Definition of Effective Sentences and Terms of Formation
• Characteristics of Command Sentences and Examples
• Definition and Examples of Ineffective Sentences
• Definition and How to Determine Fact Sentences
• Definition, Characteristics, and Examples of Invitation Sentences
• Definition, characteristics, and examples of active sentences and passive sentences
• How to Find Key Sentences

Differences in Public Health & Environmental Health Majors – Who says, to be able to work in the health sector, you only have to be a doctor? In fact, currently there are many other jobs in the health sector with good prospects and salaries. Therefore you don’t have to study medicine to work in the health sector, there are other majors you can choose from. Call it the Department of Public Health and Environmental Health. Then what is the difference between the two? Here’s the explanation, Sinaumed’s!

What is a Public Health Major?

The Department of Public Health is a major that teaches, as well as gives you training to understand public health conditions in various environmental conditions. At the beginning of the course you will study Population Science, Health Policy, Occupational Health, Biochemistry, Pathology, Nutrition, Disease Epidemiology, Health Sociology, and other materials.

The initial learning was indeed quite a lot considering that in practice this knowledge is used in communities with various conditions. Examples of activities that are usually carried out in this department range from identifying various diseases that occur in the environment, studying the healthy lifestyle and behavior of the community itself, calculating the magnitude of disease distribution in an area, calculating health conditions quantitatively, analyzing environmental impacts on public health, and occupational health and safety factors.

In implementing lectures, you will not only study theory because the main task of graduates is preventive and promotive efforts, therefore you will do a lot of field practice and be trained to interact with the community.

Examples of practices that are usually carried out are epidemic surveys and investigations, waste management, health program planning and evaluation, health outreach, community health empowerment, disease control, case studies on community healthy lifestyles, and many more Sinaumed’s.

Job prospects for graduates of the Department of Public Health are wide open not only in the health sector, but also in disease prevention, epidemic control, health policy, environmental health, health care, health promotion to epidemiology, and bioterrorism. Moreover, along with the times, health problems in Indonesia are increasingly complex. Starting from various infectious diseases such as the Zika virus and HIV/AIDS, or non-communicable diseases such as lung cancer and heart disease. Public Health Specialists have an important role in solving these health problems, in another sense this major gives you the tools to do something useful for others.

Are you Health students doing research? The Health Statistics Book is here for you. This book explains in detail about sample calculations and sample techniques in the health sector, even with examples. Not only that, it contains various other explanations about research samples in the Health sector. With communicative and informative language, it will make it easier for you to understand the explanation.

What is an Environmental Health Major?

The Department of Environmental Health is a scientific discipline to achieve a balance between the environment and humans, the goal is to create an environment that is clean, healthy, comfortable, safe and protected from various kinds of diseases. The things that this department is trying to deal with are, for example, environmental pollution, which is currently getting out of control.

It should be noted, environmental health workers generally have two mainstream areas, namely as programmers or officers and auditors or supervisory groups. His area of ​​work is related to environmental sanitation, health safety and the environment both in public places, industry, the informal sector and mining, as well as groups that have a macro vision such as health-oriented development or also known as risk management. Now, the area worked on by environmental health workers is expanding, starting from industrial, mining, urban sanitation, basic sanitation, restaurants, hotels, tourism, and so on.

Lectures at the Department of Environmental Health itself will study the relationship or interaction of a population group and the environment that has the potential to harm the health of oneself and the community in an area. The course descriptions include environmental chemistry, environmental physics, environmental microbiology, water sanitation, soil, food and drink, environmental health impact analysis, and so on. This course will of course also be supported by various kinds of practicums, so that you are not only an expert in theory, but also able to practice the theory well, so that you can realize Indonesia as a healthier country.

This major is perfect for you who have great concern for the surrounding environment and health. The job prospects for this major are also very broad, you can work in the public sector, for example at the Ministry of Health and the Health Service, the Ministry of Environment and Provincial and Regional Environmental Agencies, National and Regional Planning Agencies, Hospitals, BPJS Health and Employment, BUMN, Lecturers , the National Narcotics Agency, Sucofindo, WHO, and so on or the private sector such as in the HSE (Health Safety Environmental) division and various oil, gas, agricultural, manufacturing, and so on companies.

Apart from that, this work is also a noble one, because as we all know Indonesia really needs professionals in the field of environmental health, because environmental pollution is getting worse every day and will certainly have an impact on the poor quality of public health if Sinaumed’s does not immediately take care of it.

Public Health Department Job Prospects

Nutritionists

The profession of a nutritionist plays a role in providing consultation and counseling about good diet in order to prevent or degenerative diseases. Not only to help plan the best eating pattern and menu for a diet or weight loss program and a healthier body, consultations with nutritionists are also carried out by a group of people with certain health conditions, such as diabetes. Cancer. Malnutrition, either due to malnutrition or obesity, Disorders of the immune system, Diseases of the digestive system, Heart disease, High blood pressure, High cholesterol, Kidney and liver disease, Pregnancy and lactation as well as society as a whole.

Apart from food related matters, nutrition also studies the needs of the body. We will find out various formulas for ideal body weight, daily caloric needs, calculating body mass index, and so on. A nutritionist works to provide knowledge ranging from healthy living habits, explaining the composition of food or drink, etc. in a population.

You can also become a nutritionist in a food, beverage, or drug product company, where you have to analyze to ensure product quality management is appropriate or not. The duties of a Nutritionist include:

• Conduct individual or group counseling on the basic rules of good nutrition, healthy eating habits, and monitoring nutrition to improve their quality of life
• Determining nutritional status, factors that influence nutritional disorders, and nutritional status
• Assess nutritional needs, dietary restrictions, and current health plans to develop and implement diet plans and provide nutrition counseling
• Provide a diagnosis related to nutritional problems based on the results of a physical examination and previous medical history
• Provide information regarding nutritional principles, healthy diet plans and modifications, and food preparation and choices, particularly to patients and their families
• Design and modify diet arrangements, and implement them from menu planning to meal serving suggestions
• Conduct research and development of nutrition in accordance with developments in science and technology to administer nutrition services

This book is very inspiring and interesting to read for those of you who are looking to add insight into health communication. Through this book, Deddy Mulyana and Leila Mona Ganiem are able to bridge intercultural communication with medical science. In addition, there will be many other discussions in this book, of course related to health communication. Interesting right?

Epidemologist

The next promising job prospect for the Department of Public Health is to become an epidemiologist. This expert is very important in the world of health, the task of an epidemiologist in general is to work to discuss patterns of health or a disease and all factors related to disease.

However, it is not just an epidemiologist who analyzes a disease, because he will use various components to summarize it, such as medicine, statistics, sociology and anthropology. The Epidemiologist’s duties include:

• Monitor and report incidents of communicable diseases to local and state health agencies
• Plan and direct studies to investigate human or animal diseases, prevention methods, and treatments for diseases
• Communicate research findings on various types of diseases to health practitioners, policy makers and the public
• Provides expertise in the design, management and evaluation of research protocols and health status questionnaires, sample selection and analysis
• Oversee public health programs, including statistical analysis, health planning, surveillance systems, and public health improvement

Biostatistics

Public Health graduates also have the opportunity to try the biostatistics profession. This work is based on the science of biostatistics which is used to collect data on health phenomena from the public and map them. Like an epidemiologist, the data collected by a biostatist is very useful in various developments in the health sector. Biostatistical assignments include:

• Providing statistical data and information, starting from the preparation stage, data collection, processing, to presentation and publication.
• Perform statistical analysis and development. Perform statistical calculations based on the acquisition of data in the field.
• Perform analysis of statistical data then provide interpretation of the results of the analysis.
• Identify relationships and trends in data and other factors that may influence research results.
• Create statistical analysis reports, including presenting information in the form of graphs, tables and charts.
• Perform analysis and interpretation of statistical data to identify differences in the relationship between various sources of information.

Occupational Health and Safety

Professional Occupational Safety and Health Experts or commonly referred to as K3 are tasked with managing hazards and risks that may occur in the work environment or project, the aim of which is to prevent or improve unsafe working conditions. Occupational Safety and Health Experts will measure hazard factors, supervise and audit facilities in the work environment, install safety devices on machines, or direct device installation, and others.

Based on the Law, Occupational Safety and Health Guarantee is intended for all workers whether on land, at sea, or in the air who are within the jurisdiction of the Republic of Indonesia. So basically, every worker in Indonesia has the right to guarantee occupational safety and health. The tasks themselves include:

• Checking the physical health, mental condition and physical abilities of the workers
• Assist in overseeing the implementation of occupational safety and health legislation in accordance with the specified field
• Educating workers about the conditions and hazards that may arise in the workplace, as well as the safeguards and protective equipment required at the workplace
• Educating workers about safe ways and attitudes in carrying out their work
• Responsible for accident prevention and fire eradication as well as improving occupational safety and health, as well as providing first aid in the event of an accident

Health Policy Administration

You can also work in the field of health policy administration. Where this work is a management and organizational process that is used as a means of determining public work, which has the aim of providing services to the community. You can become a manager of a hospital, work in a BPJS or insurance office, manager of a pharmaceutical company, laboratories and medical devices, health services to institutions and social organizations.

Job Prospects of the Department of Environmental Health

Environmental Health and Safety Specialist

The duties of this profession include cleaning up polluted areas, reducing waste, and providing advice to policy makers. Environmental health and safety specialists aim to protect people and the environment by identifying problems, enforcing regulations, analyzing hazards and preventing accidents. They work with safety policies, examine their weaknesses and effectiveness, and suggest changes that optimize safety and health.

Food Supervisor

Food safety supervisors are tasked with protecting consumers from hazardous foods. They are responsible for implementing, interpreting and explaining food product standards, as well as carrying out daily inspections of products before and after processing. The duties of a supervisor include:

• Check the maturity and stability of raw materials for processing and finished products for reasons of safety, quality and nutritional value.
• Inspect food processing sites to ensure compliance with government regulations and standards for hygiene, safety standards, quality standards, and waste disposal standards.
• Evaluate food processing and storage operations and assist in the development of quality assurance programs.
• Learn methods to improve aspects of food such as its chemical composition, taste, color, texture, and nutritional value, as well as its convenience.
• Follow the development of regulations, events, and scientific writings related to food.

Air Pollution Analyst

Air pollution analysts are responsible for analyzing, sampling and measuring the data they collect from polluted air. After discovering or theorizing about the source of a pollutant, they work with other scientists to develop techniques that will reduce or eradicate air pollution.

Environmental Toxicology

When organisms metabolize toxic chemicals, that’s where the role of an environmental toxicologist comes in to study how that happens. They also study how organisms move through ecosystems and food webs, as well as the effects of non-lethal and lethal chemicals on a species. If you are able to think methodologically, scientifically and enjoy experimenting, a career in environmental toxicology may be for you.

Groundwater Protection Specialist

One of the important things for our life is water, which comes from the ground. For those of you who wish to pursue a career as a groundwater protection specialist, you will work in the field as well as in the laboratory. You also have to be prepared to face all kinds of weather and be able to survive in bad conditions. You will be tasked with finding chemicals from industrial waste, streams, and other sources from Sinaumed’s.

Environmental Consultant

If you are motivated to protect the environment and have an understanding of running a business, then a career as an environmental consultant could be the right choice. As an environmental consultant, you will work with companies on a variety of environmental issues.

You will offer expert consulting and assessment services to clients with the aim of minimizing or eliminating environmental damage. This profession will usually be employed by consulting firms and work on various commercial or government contracts, or work on various environmental issues.

Has Sinaumed’s recognized the Differences between Public Health and Environmental Health Majors? If not, Sinaumed’s can learn more by reading books on sinaumedia.com and sinaumedia Digital

sinaumedia will always be #Friends Without Limits by always providing quality and easily accessible books for all of you.

The Textbook for Nursing Service Quality Management is written very simply and easily understood, especially for you nursing students or work colleagues. This book emphasizes the implementation of management in order to improve the quality of nursing care so that users of health services will get satisfaction.

Source: from various sources

Diachronic Ways of Thinking – Have you ever complained while studying history because you have to understand many events and their full dates? Apparently, this is part of the concept of historical thinking. The concept of historical thinking is an approach to understanding and analyzing past events. So, there are two concepts of historical thinking, namely synchronic and diachronic.

Synchronic and diachronic are two concepts used to study history. Synchronic means the concept of studying history which is very broad with space, but has limitations in terms of time, while diachronic means the concept of studying history based on the time sequence of these historical events or according to the chronological order in which the events occurred.

Synchronic research in linguistics is used to compare one language with another by focusing on one period of time or one period horizontally, according to the time when learning the language, while diachronic research in linguistics is used to see comparisons or language development in two periods. decreasingly different.

In the concept of thinking, someone certainly has their own way of thinking. One of them is a diachronic and synchronic way of thinking or thinking method. The diachronic thinking method itself is usually a method of thinking that is needed by someone in relation to understanding the science of history.

This is because in understanding the science of history, one needs the power to memorize the times, names and places contained in a science of history. Then, it invites you to feel how the experience is in learning and understanding past events.

However, what is the meaning of diachronic and what are the ins and outs of the diachronic concept, the concept of diachronic thinking, what are the characteristics of diachronic, how to think diachronically, and so on? Below will be explained in full about the diachronic.

Previously, we already understood the concept of synchronic thinking. So, understand before proceeding to the discussion below in the article getting to know the concept of synchronous thinking .

Understanding the Concept of Diachronic Thinking

Diachronic in the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI) has a meaning, which is related to the language approach by looking at historical developments over time. Etymologically, the word “diachronic” is taken from the Greek, namely he which means through or beyond and also chronicus which means time. Means diachronic or dia chronicus is something that has passed or has exceeded its time.

In addition, according to Wahyu Iryana in his book, namely Historiography of the West (2014), he said that diachronic is lengthening in time and also narrowing in space. Furthermore, according to Krisanjaya in Comparative Linguistic Nature (1996) states that in the context of linguistic studies, diachronic nature can mean that this study is oriented and focuses on the dimensions of two different time periods in descending order, following the fragments of two different times.

For example, an assessment of the mapping and distribution of language vocabulary in Jabodetabek can be carried out diachronically, following two different timelines. This characteristic is contained by historical comparative linguistics and area or geographical comparative linguistics.

From the various definitions above, it can be concluded that diachronic is a chronological way of thinking or the order that occurs from various records regarding several events which are sorted according to the events that took place. The chronology of the events in question helps to reconstruct an event based on the correct time sequence.

Usually this diachronic way of thinking is used in reconstructing historical events or it can also be used to compare historical events at the same time in different places. This diachronic process is a science that emphasizes process, so it is usually used by historians or historians.

These experts use diachronic science as a diachronic approach when speaking or analyzing a matter related to history because by using this approach, history will attempt to make evolution or change from one period to the next.

With this diachronic approach, it is possible for historians to postulate why under certain circumstances arose from previous circumstances, or why certain circumstances can continue to develop and also be sustainable, for example regarding the history of the Proclamation of Indonesian Independence and so on.

In looking at historical events, the concept of diachronic thinking has two elements, namely chronological elements and periodization elements. The chronological element is analyzing historical events in sequence according to the time they occurred, while the periodization element is analyzing historical events by classifying past events such as political, ethnic, religious, social and cultural systems.

Both are very important for reconstructing past events and finding possible connections and causalities. Because it is coherent and explains cause and effect, applying the concept of diachronic thinking can prevent someone from being exposed to hoaxes. So, when a rumor spreads, one doesn’t immediately believe it and can find causes and effects between events.

Diachronic Thinking Character

Synchronic and diachronic have their own characteristics. The synchronic approach has characteristics, such as the study is horizontal, this study does not have a comparative concept, this study focuses on examining historical events at a certain time, this study has a narrower scope, this study is more structured and systematic, and this study is deeply and seriously.

The diachronic approach has characteristics, such as this study is vertical in nature, this study has a comparative concept, this study has a broader and deeper scope of study. This study focuses on studying one event with its history, and this study can be used to examine the period of one event with another.

Then how can one think diachronically in studying historical events? In fact, diachronic thinking in studying a historical event is divided into two elements, the first is the periodization element and the second is the chronological element.

1. Periodization elements

The periodization element in diachronic thinking is an element that analyzes a historical event that took place sequentially or sequentially from certain events in the past.

2. Chronological Elements

The second element in diachronic thinking is the chronological element. This element means the element that analyzes a historical event that takes place regularly in terms of the process and time of the event.

Diachronic Thinking Concept

After understanding what diachronic is, then you also have to know how to think diachronically. The concept of diachronic thinking in history is the concept of chronological thinking or sequentially used in analyzing an event. In this case, chronological means a record of various events in order according to the time they occurred.

Chronology of historical events can then be used to help reconstruct how these events occurred based on the correct time sequence. In addition, the concept of diachronic thinking can also help compare historical events at the same time in different places but are interrelated.

Through this diachronic thinking concept, you can analyze that history occurs from time to time because of changes from time to time. Thus, this concept can be used to analyze the impact of changes in the variables of something so as to enable historians to know that certain conditions were born and occurred.

The purpose of this diachronic thinking concept is to teach you about the concept of thinking chronologically as well as orderly and sequentially because as previously explained that this diachronic thinking concept is a thinking concept that is very concerned with the process of an event occurring.

Characteristics of Diachronic Thinking

With this understanding and also the concept of diachronic thinking, you can find out what are the characteristics of diachronic. Here are the characteristics or characteristics of the diachronic.

1. Is Vertical

Diachronic is vertical, meaning that in the concept of thinking, this diachronic will describe various processes regarding an event or event from the beginning to the end of the event.

2. The discussion is broader

Because diachronic thinking is concerned with processes which are related to the chronology of an event that occurred, the scope of discussion in the concept of diachronic thinking will be broader, comprehensive, and even detailed. In this way, you or the writers can discuss history more broadly.

3. Have a Comparison Concept

Not only is the discussion broader and more vertical in nature, this diachronic has a comparative concept. That is, there will be a comparison between one event and another. This is done to be able to find out the causes and causes of these historical events.

4. Historical in nature

Because this diachronic emphasizes process and time to time, this concept is very suitable when used to carry out an analysis of a historical nature, one of which is historical events.

5. Continuous

Finally, summarized from the various definitions and characteristics that have been expressed, this diachronic will discuss an event from one period to another on an ongoing basis. This is done so that one event and the other become a unity in historical events.

The Diachronic Way of Thinking

As explained clearly above, diachronic is a way of thinking chronologically or in the sequence that occurs from various notes regarding several events which are sorted according to the events that took place.

The chronology of the events in question helps to reconstruct an event based on the correct time sequence. So if it is concluded, in simple terms this diachronic concept is a historical process based on the sequence of events and also the time sequence.

Therefore, with this understanding of the diachronic concept, the basis for thinking is that an event in history that passes through this regular course of time will be more dynamic in nature and also through a process of causality between causes and effects that influence one another.

In addition, the diachronic way of thinking used in studying history has two elements, namely the periodization element and also the chronological element. The following is an example of two concepts of diachronic thinking, namely the periodization element and also the chronological element.

1. Periodization elements

As previously explained, the element of periodization in diachronic thinking is an element that analyzes a historical event that took place sequentially or sequentially from certain events in the past.

Examples are as follows:

• In the prehistoric or prehistoric era, this diachronic concept discussed how events occurred since humans did not know writing until the discovery of script at that time.
• After that, the period of the age of the script or historical era discusses the events when humans have known writing or script until now.

2. Chronological Elements

Meanwhile, the second element in diachronic thinking is the chronological element. This element means the element that analyzes a historical event that takes place regularly in terms of the process and time of the event.

Examples are as follows:

• During the reign of King Hayam Wuruk which lasted from 1350 to 1389.
• During the Diponegoro War or also known as the Java War which took place in 1825 – 1945.
• In the era of Japanese colonialism in Indonesia which occurred in 1942 – 1945.

The Difference Between Synchronic and Diachronic Concepts

After understanding the meaning of diachronic, you must also know what is the difference between the concept of diachronic thinking and the concept of synchronic thinking. In short it can be interpreted that diachronic is something that can cross a certain time limit. Meanwhile, synchronic is a study that is carried out and focuses on research on a wider range of symptoms.

As previously explained, the diachronic concept is a concept of thinking that is arranged sequentially and also in accordance with its chronology which is usually this concept is often used to conduct research on historical science.

Meanwhile, synchronic has a broad meaning in space, but has a time limit. However, as with the diachronic concept, this synchronic concept can also be used to study a history or historical or historical thinking processes.

In the concept of diachronic thinking, historians will analyze the impact on the evolutionary process of a variable that allows certain reasons to emerge regarding the reasons for the occurrence of an event or previous condition and the reasons for developing that condition or event.

In contrast to diachronic, synchronic thinking is a broad way of thinking but limited in time, meaning that the concept of synchronic thinking is used to analyze an incident or event at a certain time or period by using a fixed point, namely regarding time.

This synchronic concept usually only analyzes a condition in an event and has no effort in making conclusions regarding the development of events that participate in a situation.

Examples of Diachronic Thinking

To find out examples of diachronic thinking in discussing history, here are some examples of diachronic when viewed from historical events that have occurred in Indonesia.

Chronology of the History of the Battle of Surabaya (27 October – 20 November 1945)

• On October 25, 1945, the British Army named NICA landed in Surabaya.
• After that, there was an incident where the blue part of the Dutch flag was torn which occurred on October 27, 1945. After that, the first battle broke out between Indonesia and the British Army.
• October 29, 1945 there was a signing of a ceasefire that took place between Indonesia and the British Army.
• October 30, 1945 at 20.30 WIB, the killing of Brigadier General Mallaby (led British troops for East Java) after a ceasefire and various clashes that occurred at that time.
• There was a change in Mallaby, namely Major General Eric Carden Robert Mansergh issued an ultimatum on November 10, 1945 to ask the Indonesian side to surrender their weapons and stop resistance.
• The ultimatum was ignored and in the end on November 10, 1945 in the morning, the British Army launched a massive attack.

In general, the difference between synchronic concepts and diachronic concepts is the depth of the discussion. The diachronic concept only looks at many events broadly and has the weakness of being superficial in looking at many events, without examining these historical events in depth.

Diachronic concepts in studying something can make it easier to understand developments from time to time, relationships between periods, the possibility of repetition of phenomena, and changes in the initial period with the next period.

Dhuha prayer prayer – Prayer is an important worship in Islam. It is so important that prayer is the first thing that will be accounted for in Padang Mahsyar. If our prayers are correct while in the world, then we can be sure that our fate will be safe in the afterlife and we can become residents of heaven.

On the other hand, those whose prayers are in disarray and never even perform them will be very sorry that day because we may have to be exposed to the torments of hell first.

In the teachings of Islam, the five daily prayers are one of the important and obligatory worships so that they cannot be left out under any circumstances or situations. This includes even if you are seriously ill and can’t stand up, you must still perform the five daily prayers while sitting or lying in bed.

In addition to performing the five daily prayers, Muslims are also advised to carry out various other forms of worship that are sunnah, including establishing sunnah prayers. It is called sunnah prayer because this prayer is not obligatory to be performed like the five daily prayers.

You can leave it, and will not get any sin. But on the other hand, sunnah prayer has enormous rewards, plus a number of very special virtues.

There are many kinds of sunnah prayers, starting from midnight prayers, hajat prayers, istikharah prayers, witir prayers, tarawih prayers in the month of Ramadan, dhuha prayers, and other sunnah prayers. Now, talking about sunnah prayers, this time we will discuss Duha prayers.

Duha prayer is a sunnah prayer that is held at Duha time or in the morning when the sun is rising, and the time just ends when it is approaching the time for the midday prayer.

For Sinaumed’s who want to perform Duha prayer, you can do it between 7 and noon. Let the worship be solemn, before starting, let’s find out first the reading of the dhuha prayer, intentions, procedures, and priorities below!

Dhuha prayer intention

Just like the obligatory prayers, the duha prayer also begins with reading the intention. Of course, the intention of the dhuha prayer with the obligatory prayer is slightly different, but the difference is not too great and the reading of the intention is not long so you can definitely memorize it easily. For Sinaumed’s who want to start praying dhuha, the following is the reading of the intention that you must recite:

أصلي سنة الضحى ركعتين لله تعالى الله أكبر

Ushallii sunnatadh dhuhaa rak’ataini lillaahi ta’aalaa. Allahu Akbar.

It means:

“I intend to do the Dhuha sunnah prayer two cycles because of Allah Ta’ala. Allah is the Greatest.”

How short and easy is it? You can definitely memorize the intention of this dhuha prayer quickly, guaranteed!

Procedure for Dhuha Prayer

Basically, Duha prayer is almost the same as the five daily prayers that we usually do every day, both from the movement and the reading. Apart from reading the intention, what makes the Duha prayer different is the number of cycles that must be done. If the five daily prayers have been determined for the number of rak’ahs and cannot be changed anymore, we can actually set the duha prayer cycles ourselves according to our abilities.

For the Duha prayer cycle itself, do at least 2 cycles, but if you are able, you can do it up to 12 cycles with the provision of greeting every 2 cycles.

The reading of short letters during the Duha prayer is also exempt. In every raka’at you must read Surah Iftitah and Surah Al-Fatihah. Only after reading Surah Al-Fatihah, Sinaumed’s can read any surah that you memorize. But it would be better if we read the letter Ad-Dhuha in the first rak’ah, and the letter Asy-Shams in the second cycle.

Dhuha prayer reading

After greeting, it doesn’t mean that the Duha prayer is over, okay! So that the Duha prayer becomes more complete, after the Duha prayer, we are required to read the Duha prayer, with the following pronunciation:

اَللّٰهُمَّ اِنَّ الضُّحَآءَ ضُحَاءُكَ وَالْبَهَاءَ بَهَاءُكَ وَالْجَمَالَ جَمَالُكَ وَالْقُوَّةَ قُوَّتُكَ وَالْقُدْرَةَ قُدْرَتُكَ وَالْعِصْمَةَ عِصْمَتُكَ اَللّٰهُمَّ اِنْ كَانَ رِزْقِى فِى السَّمَآءِ فَأَنْزِلْهُ وَاِنْ كَانَ فِى اْلاَرْضِ فَأَخْرِجْهُ وَاِنْ كَانَ مُعَسَّرًا فَيَسِّرْهُ وَاِنْ كَانَ حَرَامًا فَطَهِّرْهُ وَاِنْ كَانَ بَعِيْدًا فَقَرِّبْهُ بِحَقِّ ضُحَاءِكَ وَبَهَاءِكَ وَجَمَالِكَ وَقُوَّتِكَ وَقُدْرَتِكَ آتِنِىْ مَآاَتَيْتَ عِبَادَكَ الصَّالِحِيْنَ

Allaahumma innadh dhuhaa-a dhuhaa-uka walbahaa-a bahaa-uka wal jamaala jamaaluka wal quwwata quw watuka wal qudrata qudratuka wal ‘ishmatta ‘ishmatuk. Allaahumma in kaana rizqii fissamaa-i fa anzilhu wa in kaanafil ardhi fa-akhrijhu wa in kaana mu’assaran fayas sirhu wa in kaana haraaman fathahhirhu wa in kaana ba’iidan faqarribhu bihaqqi dhuhaa-ika wa bahaa-ika wa jamaalika wa quuwatika wa qudratika aatinii maa aataita ‘ibaadakash shalihiin.

It means:

“O my Lord, verily the time of Dhuha is the time of Your Dhuha, majesty is Your majesty, beauty is Your beauty, strength is Your strength, and power is Your power and guard is Your guard. O Allah, if my sustenance is still in the sky, send it down and if it is in the earth, take it out. If it’s difficult, make it easy, if it’s illegal, purify it, if it’s still far, bring it closer, thanks to the time of Dhuha, Your majesty, beauty, strength and power, bestow upon us all that You have bestowed upon Your pious servants.”

Dhikr after Duha prayer

Just like during the five daily prayers, after reading the Duha prayer, you don’t immediately get up and leave. It’s good if you take the time to meditate for a few minutes. The habit of dhikr after prayer can make your heart much calmer than before, and you will be given strength when worshiping Allah Subhanahu wa ta’ala. As for the dhikr that you read after the dhuha prayer is as follows:

1. First, you can start by reading the verse of the chair once. Seat verse is the most sublime letter. This Surah is the head of the Qur’an, and has the virtue of being able to open doors of wisdom, as well as being a helper for Muslims when they are experiencing any difficulties. Another advantage is that people who are diligent in reading verses of the chair will also be facilitated when experiencing death someday.
2. Read Surah Al-Ikhlas three times. Surah Al-Ikhlas itself has several virtues in the form of getting the same reward as reading the Qur’an 30 chapters, getting the love of Allah Subhanahu wa ta’ala, and building a palace if we read it 10 times.
3. Read the sentence tasbih Subhanallah (Glory be to Allah) a hundred times. Every time we read this tasbih sentence, Allah Subhanahu wa ta’ala will abort our 20 sins, and replace them with 20 rewards. Imagine if we read it 100 times, how many sins will be erased, and how many rewards will Allah Subhanahu wa ta’ala add to us?
4. Read Surah Al-Falaq three times. Surah Al-Falaq is a special letter because its readers will get the protection of Allah Subhanahu wa ta’ala and be free from magic. Reading Surah Al-Falaq before going to bed will even protect you from various dangers that might befall you.
5. Reading Surah An-Naas three times, where the reader will get protection from evil magic and bad temptations. Whether it’s temptation from humans, temptation from jinn, or satan.
6. Beristighfar or read the sentence Astagh-firullah wa atuubu ilaih a hundred times. Istighfar is known as a sentence to erase sins, it also widens the sustenance.
7. The last dhikr that you should never forget is Subhanallah wa bi-hamdih a hundred times. You need to know, Allah Subhanahu wa ta’ala loves this sentence very much, and anyone who reads it once will be written ten goodness. If you read it a hundred times, you will get a hundred good things. How about reading this dhikr sentence a hundred times? Then there will be a thousand goodness that Allah Subhanahu wa ta’ala bestows on you on that day.

The virtue of performing Duha prayer

Duha prayer is indeed not a mandatory worship, even so, Rasulullah Shalallahu Alaihi Wassalam recommends us to carry it out. Actually there are several important reasons why Rasulullah Shalallahu Alaihi Wassalam advised his people to perform dhuha prayers. First, dhuha prayer will be rewarded with a great reward. Second, dhuha prayer also has several virtues. What are the priorities?

1. Replacing alms for the whole body

Humans have 360 ​​joints, and every day all the joints must give alms. Actually this alms can be issued by saying a few sentences tasbih. But if you want the easiest and most practical way, then performing Duha prayer is the answer.

Don’t worry, you don’t need to pray up to tens of cycles, just pray 2 cycles of duha, you have replaced alms for all your joints. Another bonus, you will definitely get a big reward for practicing sunnah prayers!

From Abu Dzar radhiallahu anhu, from the Prophet sallallaahu alaihi wa sallam, he said,

 يُصْبِحُ عَلَى كُلِّ سُلامَى مِنْ أَحَدِكُمْ صَدَقَةٌ ، فَكُلُّ تَسْبِيحَةٍ صَدَقَةٌ ، وَكُلُّ تَحْمِيدَةٍ صَدَقَةٌ ، وَكُلُّ تَهْلِيلَةٍ صَدَقَةٌ ، وَكُلُّ تَكْبِيرَةٍ صَدَقَةٌ وَأَمْرٌ بِالْمَعْرُوفِ صَدَقَةٌ ، وَنَهْيٌ عَنْ الْمُنْكَرِ صَدَقَةٌ ، وَيُجْزِئُ مِنْ ذَلِكَ رَكْعَتَانِ يَرْكَعُهُمَا مِنْ الضُّحَى (رواه مسلم، رقم 1181) .

“In each of your joints must be given alms every morning; Every tasbih (reading subhanallah) is a charity, every tahmid (reading Alhamdulillah) is a charity, every tahlil (reading Lailaha illallah) is a charity, every takbir (reading Allahu Akbar) is a charity, amar bil ma’ruf is a charity, nahi ‘anil munkar is alms. All of that can be fulfilled by (praying) two rak’ahs which are done at Dhuha time.” (HR. Muslim)

2. Forgive his sins by Allah Subhanahu wa ta’ala

Allah Subhanahu wa ta’ala is indeed Forgiving, but our sins will not be forgiven if we ourselves never repent and ask Allah Subhanahu wa ta’ala for forgiveness. The good news is, by performing Duha prayer, Allah Subhanahu wa ta’ala will forgive our sins.

Not only one or two of our sins will be forgiven, but all the sins we have committed in the past. Even if our sins are as many as foam in the ocean, Allah Subhanahu wa ta’ala will not care about them and will still forgive the sins of the time.

Eits, but of course to get this forgiveness, you can’t do Duha prayers carelessly. You have to do it solemnly, read the truth, earnestly intend to repent and promise not to repeat the same mistakes as before.

3. Given enough sustenance

Everyone in this world, including you, would want to be given abundant fortune, right? With a lot of fortune, we are not only able to meet all our daily needs.

More than that, we can help others who are more in need with the sustenance we have. In order to get abundant sustenance, many people are even willing to work desperately from morning to night.

But actually working alone is not enough, because all efforts must also be accompanied by prayer. In Islamic teachings themselves, there are several practices that we can do to invite abundant sustenance, and Duha prayer is one of them.

From Nu’aim bin Hammad Al Ghothofaniy, he heard the Prophet sallallaahu ‘alaihu wa salam say,

قَالَ اللَّهُ عَزَّ وَجَلَّ يَا ابْنَ آدَمَ لاَ تَعْجِزْ عَنْ أَرْبَعِ رَكَعٍَ مِنْ أَوَّلْ أَوَّلْ أَّهَِ فَارِ رَكَعٍَ مِنْ أَوَّلْ النَّهَْ

“Allah Ta’ala says: O son of Adam, do not leave the four cycles of prayer in the early afternoon (dhuha time). Then it will suffice you at the end of the day.” (Narrated by Ahmad)

You can perform Duha prayers as many as 4 raka’at to get this one priority. Are you sure you want to leave the dhuha prayer if the priority is like this?

From the hadith above, it is clear that Allah Subhanahu wa ta’ala asks us not to leave the Duha prayer, even though this one prayer is not obligatory to do. Because by carrying out this dhuha prayer service, our needs, God willing, will be fulfilled.

4. Palaces are made in heaven

If someone asks, the best place to live, then heaven is the best place to return to. In heaven, you will never experience any difficulties like when you live on earth. You will get happiness, ease, and comfort forever.

So, by performing the Duha prayer, you are not only making your chance to enter heaven wide open. Greater than that, Allah Subhanahu wa ta’ala will also build a magnificent palace in heaven for you to live in.

However, this priority will only be obtained if you carry out the Duha prayer service as many as 12 rak’ahs regularly. Come on, who wants to go to heaven, plus having a private palace there? In a hadith, Rasulullah shallallahu alaihi wassalam said,

“Whoever prays Duha prayer 12 raka’at, Allah will make for him a palace in heaven.” (Narrated by Tirmidhi)

5. Enter the awwabin group

It is undeniable, our faith as human beings is not as perfect as the friends, especially when compared to the faith of the prophets and apostles. It’s not uncommon for our faith to go down and even plunge to its lowest point. When faith is rising, our worship is smooth, everything is done.

Whether it’s sunnah, let alone obligatory. But when faith is declining, we are often negligent in carrying out the commands of Allah Subhanahu wa ta’ala and even deliberately ignoring them. To fix it, you can perform Duha prayer. From the friend of Abu Hurairah Radhiyallahu Anhu, the Prophet sallallaahu alaihi wassalam said:

“It is not keeping the Dhuha prayer but awwab, this is the awwabin prayer.” (Narrated by Ibn Khuzaimah)

Awwabin itself has the meaning of being obedient or returning to obedience. From the hadith above, it can be concluded that the Duha prayer is the prayer of those who return to obedience in carrying out the commands of Allah Subhanahu wa ta’ala. If you are diligent in doing Duha prayers, then you will be included in this Awwabin group or the group of people who return to obedience.

6. Get the reward of Hajj and Umrah

Not all Muslims are lucky to get a call to visit Mecca and Medina, and perform the Hajj or Umrah pilgrimage. If you are one of those people who haven’t had the opportunity to visit the two holy cities, you don’t need to be sad.

The reason is, whoever performs the Fajr prayer and then sits and waits in the mosque until the sun begins to rise and performs the Duha prayer two cycles, then he will have the perfect reward for Hajj and Umrah. 

Even though we haven’t received a summons to visit the Baitullah Kaaba, or visit the Nabawi Mosque, at least we can still get the same reward as the reward of people who perform Hajj and Umrah perfectly.

7. Become a lucky person

The virtue of the dhuha prayer which is no less powerful is that, with the permission of Allah Subhanahu wa ta’ala, they get luck faster than other people. The virtue of this dhuha prayer happened during the time of the Prophet sallallaahu alaihi wassalam . At that time the companions were going to war, then Rasulullah SAW asked the Mujahideen to get a lot of spoils of war or ghanimah and quickly return to Medina.

The Mujahideen then returned quickly from the war and received many benefits in the form of ghanimah. Seeing this, Rasulullah Shalallahu Alaihi Wassalam said:

“Would you like me to show you which destination is closest and has the most ghanimah, and come back quickly?”

They replied, “Yes!”

So Rasulullah Shalallahu Alaihi Wassalam said, “Whoever takes ablution, then enters the mosque, and performs the Duha prayer, then he is the closest to his goal, gets the most ghanimah, and returns the fastest.” (Narrated by Tirmidhi)

Duha prayer is indeed a sunnah prayer, but seeing its special virtues, it’s a loss if we just skip the Duha prayer. Plus, this one prayer service also has a number of cycles that are not too many so it doesn’t take long to do it.

Considering that Duha time starts at 7 in the morning, you still have time to perform Duha prayers at least two cycles before starting your daily activities. For Sinaumed’s who want to learn the dhuha prayer readings, and other prayer services, you can visit www.sinaumedia.com . Here, you can get various books about obligatory prayers, sunnah prayers, and various other acts of worship in Islam. As #FriendsWithoutLimits, we always try to provide the best and latest information for you.

Author: Siti Marliah

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

Prayer After Fardhu Prayer – The five daily fardhu prayer is a mandatory worship that must be carried out by every Muslim under any circumstances, anytime and anywhere. However, a Muslim who experiences certain conditions such as illness is given relief in performing fardhu prayers.

For example, if there is someone who is sick and cannot stand up, then it is permissible to perform fardhu prayers while sitting. If you can’t sit, then it’s permissible to fall asleep, if you can’t at all, then it’s permissible to pray with a sign.

When establishing fardhu prayers, there are several sunnah practices that are recommended to be carried out in Islam. Among them is reading the prayer before and after the fardhu prayer. These prayers can grant someone’s wish, perfect worship and have other virtues.

The Proof of Reciting Dhikr After Prayer

Although dhikr and prayer after the five obligatory prayers are not obligatory, a Muslim should not leave the place and leave immediately after the prayer. This Sunnah for dhikr and prayer has been hinted at by the Prophet Muhammad SAW and in accordance with the word of Allah SWT in the letter An Nisa verse 103.

Allah also said in Surah Al Jumuah verse 10, along with the verse.

Because, by doing dhikr after the prayer, the dhikr will patch up the deficiencies that existed in the prayer that Sinaumed’s had previously performed. Likewise with dhikr, with dhikr, a person has connected his worship with other worship, so that a Muslim will not feel satisfied just by praying.

In dhikr after finishing prayer, a Muslim should follow the demands of the Prophet Muhammad SAW and recite the dhikr taught by the Prophet.

Reading Dhikr After Prayer

As explained above, that dhikr should be read in accordance with the demands and teachings of the Prophet Muhammad. The goal is that the dhikr that is read can complete the prayer service that was previously carried out and also increase the reward. Here are some dhikr after prayer that Sinaumed’s can read.

1. Read istighfar 3 times

From Tsauban ra, the Prophet Muhammad SAW said,

(O Allah, you are greetings and safety are only from you, Glory be to You, O One who has all majesty and glory. (HR. Muslim no 591)).

2. Read the tahlil

From Al Mughirah bin Syu’bah ra, he said,

(There is no god who has the right to be worshiped except Allah alone, there is no partner for Him. All praise and kingdom belong to Allah. Allah has power over everything. O Allah, nothing prevents what You give and no one gives what You prevent it. Wealth and glory are of no use to their owners. From You are all wealth and glory.) (Narrated by Bukhari no 6615, Muslim no 593).

3. Read tasbih, tahmid, takbir and tahlil 100 times

After finishing reading the two forms of dhikr above, Sinaumed’s can then read tasbih, tahmid, takbir and tahlil after finishing the prayer. There are four authentic readings of tasbih, tahmid, takbir and tahlil from the Prophet SAW. Here’s an explanation.

• Tasbih is read 33 times, tahmid is read 33 times, takbir is read 33 times, tahlil is read once. So that the total reading dhikr 100 times. In accordance with the words of the Prophet SAW in a hadith narrated by Muslims.

(Glory be to Allah, all praise be to Allah, Allah is the Greatest (33 times). There is no god who has the right to be worshiped except Allah alone. There is no partner for Him. All kingdoms and worship belong to Allah. He is the Almighty over everything. )

Then all his mistakes will be forgiven, even if they are as much as the foam in the ocean. (HR. Muslim no 597).

• Tasbih is recited 33 times, tahmid is recited 33 times, takbir is recited 34 times, so that a total of 100 recitations of dhikr are recited. This dhikr is in accordance with a hadith narrated by Muslim. Here’s the hadith.

From Ka’ab bin Ujrah ra, from the Prophet SAW:

• Tasbih is recited 25 times, tahmid is recited 25 times, takbir is recited 25 times, tahlil is recited 25 times, so that the total recitation of dhikr is 100 times.

In accordance with the history of Zaid bin Thabit ra, he said:

• Tasbih is read 10 times, tahmid 10 times, takbir 10 times. Then the total dhikr as much as 30 times. The following hadith explains the recitation of the dhikr.

From Abdullah bin Amr ra, the Prophet SAW said:

Prayer After Fardhu Prayer

After reciting the dhikr in accordance with the sunnah of Rasulullah SAW, it is best for Sinaumed’s not to get up from his seat and continue reading the prayer. By praying after finishing the prayer, one’s wish or hajat will be easily granted. Here are some prayers after fardhu prayers that Sinaumed’s can read.

1. Read the prayer Laa ilaha illallah wahdahu laa syarika lahu”

As the history of Abdullah bin Zubair ra, as follows:

(There is no God who has the right to be worshiped other than Allah alone, there is no partner for Him. All praise and kingdom belong to Allah alone. Allah has power over everything. There is no power and effort except with Allah’s help. There is no God who has the right worshiped except Allah. We do not worship except Him. All favors, gifts and good praise belong to Allah. There is no god who has the right to be worshiped except Allah by purifying worship only to Him, even if the disbelievers do not like it. (Narrated by Muslim no. 594)

2. Read the verse of the chair

As you know that the verse chair has many virtues. Therefore, the verse of the chair is also recommended to be read after completing the obligatory prayer. As hadith from Abu Umamah Al Bahili ra, the Prophet SAW once said:

Meaning: Whoever reads the verse of the chair after every obligatory prayer, then nothing can prevent him from entering heaven except death. (HR. An Nasai no 9928, Ath Thabrani no 7532, authenticated by Al Albani in Sahih Al Jami ‘no 6464)

3. Read the letters Al Ikhlas, Al Falaq and An Naas

In a hadith from Uqbah bin Amir ra, he said: Rasulullah SAW ordered me to read surah al mu’awwidzar (an naas, al falaq, al sincere) at the end of each prayer. (Narrated by Abu Daud no 1523, authenticated by Al Albani in authentic Abu Daud)

4. Read the prayer Allahumma inni as aluka ilman naafian

From Umm Salamah Hindun bint Abi Umayyah ra, she said: Usually Rasulullah SAW, when he prays at dawn when he greets him, he will read: alloohumma inni as-aluka ‘ilman naafi’an, wa rizqon thoyyiban, wa ‘amalan mutaqobbalan (O Allah, I beg of You are useful knowledge, good sustenance and accepted practice.) (HR. Ibn Majah no 762, authenticated by Al Albani in Shahi Ibni Majah).

Those are some collections of dhikr and prayers after fardhu prayers that Sinaumed’s can follow and read after carrying out the five daily obligatory prayers. If Sinaumed’s is interested in knowing and reading the prayers after other prayers, then Sinaumed’s can read the collection of prayers available at sinaumedia.com .

As #FriendsWithoutLimits, of course we provide a variety of books, including prayer collection books for Sinaumed’s. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

So what are you waiting for? Buy and read the book right now!

Author: Khansa

What is the first thing that comes to your mind when you hear the term design thinking ? Maybe for you, design thinking is synonymous with innovation, thinking out-of-the-box , having new breakthroughs, and so on. Actually, you’re not wrong.

The three word phrases are indeed the desired results from the process of doing design thinking . Usually, the ability to do design thinking is needed in jobs related to product design, user experience, UX designer , architecture, and others.

Design thinking does not only apply in this job, it is also needed in business. Design thinking does have advantages such as cost savings and guaranteed return on investment (ROI), making users more loyal, and saving development time.

That said, design thinking is also very important for startups . Startups invent, test products or services and often fail before getting funding to continue their innovation. Startup must be able to define a problem and answer it with the product results. Design thinking is where it comes into play.

So, what is meant by design thinking ? What are the characteristics and application? Continue to read the information below so you can understand design thinking .

What is Design Thinking?

On the internet, you will find many definitions of design thinking . According to the “Interaction Design Foundation”, for example, design thinking is referred to as an iterative process of understanding users, challenging assumptions, redefining problems, and creating solutions.

Meanwhile, the “Career Foundry” said that design thinking is an ideology as well as a process for solving complex problems that emphasize the interests of the user. Simply put, design thinking is an approach or method of solving problems both cognitively, creatively, and practically to answer human needs as users.

Design thinking includes processes such as context analysis, problem finding and framing, idea and solution generation, creative thinking, sketching and drawing, modeling and prototyping, testing and evaluating.

The essence of design thinking includes the ability to:

• Solving complex problems.
• Turning strategy into solutions.
• Using abductive and productive reasoning.
• Using non-verbal, graphic or spatial modeling media, for example, sketching and prototyping.

Design thinking gives us space to fail. Learning from failure, we must understand why we failed and why we have to fix it. Design thinking is also linked to recipes for product and service innovation in business and social contexts. Some of these recipes have been criticized for oversimplifying the design process and downplaying the role of technical knowledge and skills.

John E. Arnold was one of the first writers to use the term design thinking . In ” Creative Engineering ” (1959) he distinguishes four areas of design thinking. According to Arnold, design thinking can produce, among other things:

• New functionality, i.e. solutions that meet new needs or solutions that meet old needs in entirely new ways.
• Higher level of solution performance.
• Lower production costs.
• Salability improvement.

Thus, according to this initial concept, design thinking encompasses all forms of product innovation, including especially incremental innovation (higher performance) and radical innovation (new functionality). Arnold recommends a balanced approach: Product developers should explore opportunities in all four areas of design thinking.

Even though it has many meanings, there are four characteristics that you will always encounter in design thinking .

1. Solution-Based or People-Centered

The interests of humans as users are the main focus in the design thinking method . Hence, design thinking plays the role of identifying problems that are being faced by humans and answering these problems with solutions that are useful and effective for them.

In other words, design thinking relies heavily on solutions to answer these needs. This kind of approach will require someone to come up with something constructive to solve a problem.

Solution-based thinking is summed up in research by Bryan Lawson, Professor of Architecture at the University of Sheffield, which compares the process of problem solving by a group of scientists vs a group of designers. Lawson said that groups of scientists tend to identify problems ( problem-based ), while groups of designers prioritize problem solutions ( solution-based) . So, solution-based is carried out experimentally in order to find the right solution.

2. Hands-On

One of the stages carried out in design thinking is prototyping, turning ideas into real products. This stage allows direct testing from the design team on semi-finished products. Hands-on characteristics will not exist in a business that does not use design thinking . For example, with the rise of coffee shops which are increasingly mushrooming in big cities.

The existence of coffeeshops with the same business model and offerings will only make the competition in the coffeeshop industry more stringent. The rise of coffee shops also does not try to question the problems that exist in coffee enthusiasts. As a result, no solutive product is produced.

3.Highly Creative

Some say that being creative means being able to create something new. There are also those who argue that a creative person can connect things that were previously unrelated. If you look at it, the point is the same, that creativity demands novelty.

This characteristic is closely related to design thinking . Solving problems and answering them with solutions is the main goal of design thinking . However, the solution offered must also present a fresh concept in order to attract users.

If the solution already exists, isn’t it natural that users aren’t interested in your offer?

4. Done Repeatedly or Iteratively

Design thinking always starts with looking for problems. Why bother looking for trouble? This is because user behavior and desires are constantly changing. Not only that, in fact, users do not really know what they want.

That is evidenced by the words of Henry Ford, the founder of one of the largest car companies in the world, Ford. “If I asked what the user wanted, they would say a faster horse,” he said. Even though in the end Ford didn’t produce horses, at least he managed to contribute something faster, right?

Users don’t know that what you produce will end up being something they need the second it appears in plain sight. Design thinking exists to bridge this gap. It will be used continuously to offer this invisible desire, until the results are able to answer what the user really needs.

Process in Design Thinking

Design thinking is not a new term. The idea of ​​using a design approach for creative problem solving has long been discussed by experts since the 1960s. Experts contribute their thoughts to each other, thus forming the concept of design thinking .

It was John E. Arnold who first put forward the term design thinking in his book “Creative Engineering” in 1959. Then, in 1965, L. Bruce Archer responded to this idea by arguing that design thinking needed to be done systematically.

Herbert Simon, an American sociologist and psychologist contributed his thoughts through his article entitled The Sciences of The Artificial which was published in 1969. Simon introduced 7 steps to using design as a creative approach to problem-solving .

It was the essence of Simon’s concept that later inspired the 5 stages of design thinking that are commonly known today. This concept became more popular after being applied by David Kelley and Tim Brown to the design company they founded, IDEO. They see that companies are less creative in handling extreme cases that happen to them.

These five stages do not have to be sequential, but can also be implemented non-linearly. That is, in certain stages, you might find an insight that makes you have to improve results at other stages.

In addition, these five stages can also be moved/changed in order, or carried out simultaneously, and repeated several times to open up opportunities for the best solutions.

For more details, see the chart below.

Stages of Design Thinking

1. Empathize

Empathize in design thinking is a crucial early stage. Although these five stages can be carried out in parallel, most projects start with this stage. In this stage, you have to put empathy to know the users and understand their wants, needs, and goals. This stage also requires the observer to leave his assumptions about the user for a moment and begin to understand the mindset of the user.

To get away from assumptions, you can ask what the user is doing ( what ), how is he doing it ( how ), and why is he doing it ( why ). These three questions will help you make objective observations.

In order to understand users from the psychological to the emotional side, you can interact directly with users. However, currently, there are many ways that can be used to understand users. For example, such as analyzing product feedback and identifying user behavior on social media.

2. Define

After collecting data related to users, your next task is to analyze that data. Next, identify the problems or obstacles experienced by users. The define stage in design thinking itself is carried out to mention the problem statement .

In naming the problem, make sure you are using the user’s point of view, not emphasizing the action the company should take. For example, you find that there is a need for hand protective fluid to protect yourself from the Covid-19 virus.

From there, state the problem with “Indonesian people need…” instead of “Our company has to make…” This will help to clearly distinguish the problem statement and not confuse the company about calling a problem with a solution.

3. Ideate

With knowledge of user complaints and clear problem statements, now is the time for you to compile creative ideas as problem solutions. This is where the creative process begins. The Nielsen Norman Group defines idea as the process of generating a series of ideas based on a particular topic, without any attempt to judge or evaluate them. So, here, you are free to explore any ideas.

However, formulating creative ideas is not easy. Some ideas will be considered interesting and others will just end up in the trash. Therefore, at this stage you are required to think out-of-the-box . If you have trouble coming up with brilliant ideas, you can follow some of the ideation methods that are often used, such as brainstorming, mindmapping , and bodystorming ( roleplay ).

4. Prototypes

After choosing the most genius idea, you have to make a visualization of your idea. This stage does require experimentation to turn ideas into something visible. The prototype itself is an unfinished product, a simulation, a sample that can evaluate the ideas and designs that you have designed, for example, like a beta version in making a website. This stage is important for testing whether the product that has been worked on so far is in accordance with what was planned.

At this stage, the solutions offered can be accepted, repaired, redesigned, even rejected. Therefore, the function of this stage is to re-question whether the existing product can answer user problems.

5.Test

As the name implies, at this stage, you have to test the prototype to the user. Sometimes, testing is optional. However, testing will provide its own advantages, namely product reviews . From there, you can maximize the product again from feedback from users.

Even though this stage is at the end, it does not mean that the design thinking process has been completed. As previously said, design thinking is a non-linear method . The testing process may reveal deficiencies or gaps in other design thinking processes .

In that case, you have to fix the result of the incomplete process. For example, after testing it turns out that the user doesn’t really need it. It could be, the problem statement that you formulated is not quite right. So, you have to repeat the identification of the problem in the define stage , then redefine the ideas as problem solutions.

Example of Application of Design Thinking: Case Study of Gojek

This time, you will find out about Gojek’s success in finding problems and providing solutions using design thinking. The founder of Gojek, Nadiem Makarim, is worried when many people don’t believe that ojek can be a professional job.

He answered these doubts through an innovative invention in the form of an application to connect online motorcycle taxi partners and passengers with Gojek. As of 2020, Gojek has accumulated 38 million monthly active users, won the unicorn title in May 2017, and became decacorn two years later.

The following are the stages of Gojek’s discovery using design thinking .

1. Empathize

Nadiem said that the motorcycle taxi sector is very valuable. This stems from his personal experience, preferring to take a motorcycle taxi instead of bringing his own car to avoid Jakarta’s traffic jams. Nadiem found that the community also felt the same anxiety and needed alternative transportation.

On the other hand, because he often rides motorcycle taxis, Nadiem can understand the ins and outs of a motorcycle taxi driver who works 14 hours a day and does not see his wife and children, but only gets 4 passengers. Nadiem is concerned about the fate of motorcycle taxi drivers.

2. Define

Nadiem tries to answer the existing problems by emphasizing that consumers face traffic jams every day. On the other hand, there is uncertainty about the income of a motorcycle taxi driver, even after working many hours a day.

Apart from that, Nadiem also saw that when there were many motorbike taxis available, there were not many passengers who needed his services. However, when passengers need it, the motorcycle taxi is not there. Nadiem said, this causes market inefficiency. Therefore, Nadiem felt he had to make a new breakthrough to accommodate this.

Potential problem statement: “People need alternative transportation to avoid Jakarta traffic jams and motorcycle taxi drivers need income certainty (passengers)”.

3. Ideate

Capitalized on public anxiety over Jakarta’s traffic jams, the plight of motorcycle taxi drivers, and the formulation of the problem statement above, Nadiem formulated several solutions. One of them, and which will be the basis for making its current product, is to create a link between the needs of passengers and motorcycle taxi drivers.

4. Prototypes

In 2010, Nadiem created a call center for conventional motorcycle taxis with 20 drivers. After receiving a positive response from the community, Gojek then developed its application.

5.Test

In 2015, Gojek released the Go-Ride application to see the community’s response. It wasn’t long before drivers started registering in droves, from 20 people initially to 800 people in 2015. Gojek has succeeded in becoming a liaison for online motorcycle taxi partners with customers who need alternative transportation to avoid Jakarta’s traffic jams. In addition to these main services, Gojek is also increasingly developing its business in food delivery services, goods, purchasing of goods, cleaning services, and others.

Book Recommendations & Related Articles 

• 12 Examples of Marketing Strategies Worth Trying
• Marketing Management: Definition, Functions, Objectives, Duties, and Concepts
• Definition of Variable Costs: Characteristics, Types, Examples, and Formulas
• Definition of Marketing and 7 Types!
• Definition of Promotion: Definition of Experts, Types, and Examples

Descriptive research is – Have you ever heard of the term descriptive research? Descriptive research is one of the many types of research that experts often use to write down their findings. These experts can come from among lecturers, students, even anyone who does have a profession as a researcher.

Research activity is an important activity to be carried out to help develop science and technology. So, it’s no wonder that all governments from every country in the world, especially Indonesia, strongly encourage researchers and academics to conduct research. In fact, in Indonesia, lecturers have an obligation to conduct research.

In order for research activities to run smoothly, the research methods chosen and used must also be appropriate. This is done with the aim of making it easier for researchers to get the desired, appropriate, and accurate results in the process.

As for one research method that can and is widely used by a wide audience is descriptive research.

Descriptive research is a research method whose writing seeks to describe the subject or object being studied in more depth, detail, and breadth. This method is usually used to solve or answer a problem by collecting data, analyzing, classifying, making conclusions, and reporting.

The way of presenting the data obtained in the descriptive research method is by using graphs, tables, pictograms, diagrams, calculating the mean, mode, median, standard deviation, or calculating percentages.

Basically, this type of research method is more widely used in the health sector. This is because the descriptive research method is very different from other methods and has a tendency to focus more on discussing an ongoing phenomenon.

So, what exactly is the meaning of descriptive research? To find out more in-depth information, come on, see the explanation below! Definitions, criteria, and characteristics used in descriptive research.

Definition of Descriptive Research

Descriptive research is one of the research methods used to describe the characteristics of a population or an ongoing phenomenon. Therefore, this one research method has the main focus on explaining how the object of research is in depth. So, it can be the answer to what events and phenomena are happening in the research process.

This descriptive research method then becomes different compared to other research methods. This is caused by descriptive research methods which tend to focus more on discussing why a phenomenon or event can occur in society.

What is meant by phenomena or events from descriptive research is something that is the object of research. Then of course, the results of the research will describe the object of research in more detail and depth.

Can you understand it already? If you still feel a little confused about the meaning of descriptive research, maybe the meaning of descriptive research from the experts below will help you a little.

Definition of Descriptive Research According to Experts

Check out the opinions of experts regarding the meaning or definition of the following descriptive research method, come on!

1. According to Hidayat

The first definition of descriptive research was conveyed by Hidayat (2010). Hidayat explained that the descriptive research method is a study that is carried out more broadly in the use and collection of data. The meaning of the broad word here is that researchers are more inclined to carry out long analyzes that are used from the beginning to the end of the study.

Researchers who ultimately choose to use this descriptive research method will be required to have a strong commitment in conducting their research. This commitment can come from mastering theory to implementation when it goes directly to the field.

This commitment is really needed by prospective researchers because, as Hidayat has said before, this research method requires a very long, broad, and in-depth analysis.

2. According to Sukmadinata

Through his book written in 2006, Sukmadinata explained that the definition or definition of descriptive research method is a research characteristic that reveals and explains various natural and social phenomena that exist and occur in people’s lives, in a more specific, detailed, and deeper manner. .

This specific word in its definition is intended to explain the relationship aspects, the impacts that occur, and the possible solutions that can be carried out from these research activities.

So, in this case, the researcher can choose one object to be the focus of his research. After that, the object and results of the research will be explained in detail and specifically in the research report.

3. According to Etna Widodo Muchtar

The next definition of descriptive research was conveyed by Etna Widodo Muchtar. According to Etna Widodo Muchtar in 2000, he said that research using descriptive methods is a research method used to clarify a condition of social phenomena through various research variables. These many research variables must also be connected and related to one another.

In addition, Etna Widodo Muchtar also added, in a research conducted in a descriptive way, the researcher does not need to develop hypotheses first.

This is because the research activities that will be carried out later aim for the testing process. Furthermore, writing research results can also only be done if the researcher has gone directly to the field or field work practice.

4. According to Punaji

Punaji became the next expert who presented his definition of descriptive research methods. Punaji explained that research using descriptive method is a scientific research method that has the aim of explaining more specifically related to the existence of natural and social events in the community.

This in-depth and detailed explanation will then make the explanation of the results of an expert’s research more complex than usual.

The data obtained from this descriptive research method also tends to be more numerous and varied. This is because the data can be in the form of numerical data and can also be in the form of words or explanations. So, this will cause more types of data used in the research process.

For numerical data, researchers can use the data as material for quantitative research based on numbers. As for the data in the form of words, the researcher can use the data as material for qualitative research or based on quality.

5. According to Sugiyono

The opinion of the expert who conveyed the meaning of the last descriptive research was Sugiyono. According to him, descriptive research is a study that uses methods to describe or explain a result that has been achieved from a study.

However, Sugiyono also explained that the description in this descriptive research was not only used in compiling general research conclusions, but also as a whole from the beginning of the research report to its conclusion.

Because, if you look at the Big Indonesian Dictionary or KBBI, the word descriptive research must be interpreted in two different words, namely the word research and the word descriptive. According to what is written in the KBBI, the word research can be interpreted as an activity for analysis, collection, and also presentation of data, which is carried out objectively and systematically in order to solve a problem or test a hypothesis so that it can be further developed into general principles.

Meanwhile, in KBBI the word descriptive itself has a meaning as a possession of a descriptive nature that can describe something as it is. So, when these two words are combined, it can be concluded that descriptive research is a research method that is carried out by describing the object and research results as they are.

Criteria for Descriptive Research

As a research that is scientific in nature and has the aim to describe and explain an event or phenomenon that occurs in society, both natural and social, carefully. So, the descriptive research method also has several criteria that must be met in each research activity.

Determination of criteria in this descriptive research is nothing but to make the final results of the descriptive research in accordance with what was desired and expected previously. The descriptive research criteria are as follows.

1. Feasibility of Formulated Issues or Issues

The first criterion that must be met for descriptive research is about the feasibility of the problem or issues to be raised and formulated. The reason is, not all research can use descriptive methods and every researcher who wants to use this method cannot just choose.

Previously, it was necessary to examine in advance, whether the formulation of the problem really deserved to be raised or not. In addition, the formulation of the problem must also contain scientific value, because not all topics can be raised into research using descriptive methods.

2. Appropriate and Not Too Broad Research Objectives

Each research will be guaranteed by the formulation of the objectives of the research. Especially for research that uses descriptive methods, the research objectives must be precise and not too broad. Objectives should be narrowed and specific so that the contents of the report can focus more on the issues raised.

The reason is, if the research objectives are less specific and too broad, then the explanation of the results will be even wider and not focus on one object. That is the reason why it is necessary to write down the exact research objectives.

3. There are some supporting data in the form of facts

As with other research methods, descriptive research also has the criterion that any data processed in the report must be fact data. So, even though this research will describe the results of the research object, the results cannot be based on references such as books, journals, and videos alone, but researchers must go directly to the field to view and collect research data themselves.

This is intended so that the data obtained is truly in accordance with the facts and in the future it will make it easier for researchers to write research reports in more depth. This is because the researcher already understands exactly what he is studying.

4. The things used as comparison must have validation

Each study has its own standard. The use of this standard in descriptive research is to compare previous theories and future research results. This then makes the comparator must have validation, so that the research can be proven true and does not contain elements other than facts or opinions.

5. Explanation of Place and Time of Research

Selection and determination of place and time in carrying out descriptive research must be stated clearly in the research proposal. This is even made an obligation to be included in the research plan. Starting from a description of the time, location and place of research, to an explanation of the selection of methods to be used.

6. The results of the research must be explained in detail

In connection with researchers who from the beginning used descriptive research methods, the research report must also be written descriptively or explained in detail and detail.

In addition, the research object must also be described and described in full and specific so that the reader of the research report can have a complete picture of the actual research object.

Characteristics of Descriptive Research

Apart from the existence of special criteria, descriptive research also has its own special characteristics or characteristics. This is what then distinguishes descriptive research methods from others. Below are the characteristics of descriptive research as follows.

1. Describe the Variables

The first characteristic of descriptive research is its variables. The main variables that will be used in this descriptive research will be described or described and explained in detail and detail. So, researchers who use this research method must explain gender, age, education level, employment level, marital status, and other main variables in detail without skipping a single one.

2. There are two causes and effects

The next feature of this study is the existence of two causal relationships. It is this attachment relationship that the researcher will then present in depth and how to get a solution from the existence of these two relationships.

3. The research results must be presented according to the data

After the researcher presents the causal relationship from this descriptive research, then the researcher must present the results of the work, literature study, and observations in the field in accordance with the existing data and facts. This is done in order to maintain the purity of the data obtained directly in the field by researchers. After that, then the researcher can develop the case or research problem in a clearer, detailed, and detailed manner as possible.

4. Research data is collected at a certain period

In conducting descriptive research, it is necessary to determine a certain timeframe in order to make specific observations. The reason is, an event or phenomenon will usually be easier to observe if it is taken in a certain period of time.

The determination of the time period used in this study was carried out to ensure that the results obtained were accurate and as expected. Therefore, it is important to collect research data within a certain period of time.

5. Have a flexible research area

Descriptive research area is flexible. This means that the research area can be anywhere because there are no specific specific provisions. So, any area can be used by researchers as a descriptive research location.

However, in their reports, researchers still have to limit the area or location of research. Researchers may limit the research area to one village, one district, even one country. The important thing is that the researcher can take responsibility for the problem he raises.

Conclusion

Descriptive research is a research and research method used by an expert or researcher to describe an event or phenomenon in greater depth, detail and detail. Usually, this research method focuses on explaining the research object. So that the results of the research can be the answer to what events are happening during the research process.

There are various expert opinions regarding the meaning of descriptive research, including those from Sugiyono, Punaji, and Etna Widodo Muchtar. All three agreed that research with this descriptive method would explain the research object in detail.

The criteria for descriptive research are problem feasibility, research objectives, fact data, comparison validation, clarity of time and place of research, as well as research results that are explained in depth. While the characteristics for descriptive research are the description of the variables, causal relationships, data collected within a certain time period, research results presented according to the data, and flexible research areas.

So , that’s the discussion about the meaning of descriptive research for #FriendsWithoutLimits. Hope it helps, huh!

If you want to find books on research methods, then you can get them at sinaumedia.com . To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Author Name: Raden Putri

Source:

• https://katadata.co.id/iftitah/berita/624689b762261/pengertian-penelitian-dekriptif-ciri-ciri-tipe-dan-pelaksanaannya
• https://www.duniadosen.com/penelitian-descriptive/
• https://penerbitdeepublish.com/penelitian-descriptive/
• https://www.quipper.com/id/blog/tips-trick/school-life/penelitian-descriptive/

Definition and Examples of Derivative Quantities – Science in this world is very useful for human life. In addition, science can also help humans in completing a job. Therefore, many people say that science can make a life more meaningful.

One of the sciences that plays a significant role in the world is measurement, quantities, and units. This is because the life we ​​live will never be separated from everyday life, especially for workers who are related to counting. Therefore, we must always try to remember all kinds of quantities and units.

Many people already know about basic quantities, but not everyone knows about derived quantities. Even though the derived quantity can be said to have a considerable influence on counting activities. Derived quantities are quantities that are derived from the principal quantities. Even though, derived quantities are derived from basic quantities, you need to know them so that your knowledge and insight about calculations increases.

So, so that you know more about derived quantities, then you can read this article. This article about derived quantities will be discussed starting from the definition of derived quantities to examples of derived quantities. So, read this article to the end, Sinaumed’s.

Definition of Derivative Quantity

Derived quantity is a quantity that is derived from the base quantity. Basically, this derived quantity is almost the same as the basic quantity in which both of these quantities function to calculate something expressed in International Units (SI). The quantities that are calculated on derived quantities, such as area, volume, force, pressure, velocity, and others.

The units of derived quantities are often known as derived units. In addition, derived units are obtained from the combination of several base units. Therefore, we will rarely find units that consist of only one unit. Combining several fundamental quantities means that one fundamental quantity can produce several derived quantities. For example, the base unit length can give rise to the derived units of area and volume.

Each derived quantity often appears in math or physics problems when I was in high school. In fact, area, volume, and speed have existed since we were still in Elementary School (SD). Therefore, some people may not be familiar with derived quantities.

As is the definition of derived quantities, each unit of derived quantities is an adjustment of units to the base quantities. Of the many derived quantities, one of the simplest examples of derived quantities is area. For example, the derived quantity (area) of a rectangle has the formula (Length x Width), the multiplication produces the unit length (m) which is raised to the power, so that it becomes (m2).

The derived area is a quantity that is derived from the base unit length. The principal length unit has units (m). We can find the derived area in flat shapes, such as squares, rectangles, and other flat shapes. So, when we encounter a problem about calculating the area of ​​a flat shape, the unit must use the base unit raised to the power (m2).

When calculating the derived quantity it is easier to use the formula of the derived quantity itself. In other words, the formula is a measuring tool for the derived quantity itself. It’s not easy to memorize derived quantities, but as long as you really focus and really memorize them, then you remember the formula for derived quantities. Therefore, you need to memorize every formula for derived quantities. So, have you memorized the formula for each derived quantity?

The method of calculating derived quantities using this formula is often known as indirect measurement. Meanwhile, calculating the derived quantity using a measuring device is better known as direct measurement. In calculating derived quantities, you can also use measuring devices or direct measurements. The tools used to measure derived quantities can be said to be quite special.

Whether it’s direct or indirect measurement, both of them can be used in calculating derived quantities. In other words, when calculating derived quantities, it all depends on whether you are more comfortable using direct measurements or indirect measurements.

Examples of Derived Quantities and Their Units

So, if you only discuss the meaning of derived quantities, it will be incomplete if you don’t discuss examples of derived quantities. To make it easier for you to understand each derived quantity, you can refer to the table of derived quantities accompanied by their units and formulas.

Derivative Amount	International Unit (SI)	Dimensions	Symbols and Formulas
Style	Newtons (kg m/s 2 )	N : MLT -2	F = m . a
Business	Joules (kg m 2 s -2 )	J : M L2 T −2	W = F . s
Speed	Distance/Time (m/s)	V : LT -1	V = s / t
Acceleration	LT –2 (m/s 2 )	a : LT -2	a = Δv / Δt
momentum	kgm/s	[M][L][T] ⁻	P = m . v
Power	Watts (kg.m^2.s^-3)	W : [M] [L] [T] ⁻²	P=W/t
Density	Rho (kg/m 3 )	ρ	ρ=m/V
Frequency	Hertz (s –1 )	Hz	f = 1/t
Load	coulombs	C	I = Q/t
Electrical voltage	Volt	V	V = I . R
Electrical resistance	Ohms (Ω)	R	R=V/I
Wide	m2	[L] 2	W = W x W
Volume	m3	[L] 3	V = W x W x H
Pressure	Pascal (Pa) (N / m 2 )	[M][T] -2 [L] -1	P=F/A

Style

Force is a derived quantity where the units are derived from multiplying mass by acceleration. When described, the unit is (kg m / s ² ) or better known as the Newton unit. So, when calculating the magnitude of the derivative of the force, you need to provide the units of Newtons (N). The derived quantity of force is usually found in physics lessons. The formula for force is F = m . a

Business

Work is a derived quantity that has a derived unit named Joule. The Joule unit is obtained from the force multiplied by the distance which if written becomes (kg m2 s ^-2 ). As with force, we often find this effort in physics lessons. Work has a formula, namely W = F . s.

Speed

Speed ​​is a derived quantity obtained by calculating the distance traveled divided by the travel time and the unit that appears is m/s. Derived units are read as meters per second or meters per second . The derived quantity of velocity has a formula, namely V = s / t. We often find the derived quantity of velocity in mathematics lessons.

Acceleration

Acceleration is one of the derived quantities resulting from calculating the derived quantities of speed and travel time. The amount of speed derivative will be divided by the travel time that has been done. If, the derived unit of velocity is symbolized by the letter V, then the acceleration is symbolized by the letter a. The formula for the derived quantity of acceleration is a= Δv / Δt.

momentum

The next example of a derived quantity is momentum. Momentum is derived from multiplying mass and velocity, resulting in formulas such as meters per second or kilogram meters per second (kg m/s). Meanwhile, the formula for the magnitude of the momentum derivative is P = m v.

Power

Power is a derived quantity having units of watts. This watt unit is obtained from the derived unit of effort and the basic unit of time. The formula for this power derivative is P = W/t or it can be said to be the value of work divided by time. We generally find this power in physics subjects.

Density

Density is a derived quantity that is derived from the principal unit mass and derived from the principal unit length (m3), thus creating units such as (kg / m3 ) ^or kilograms per cubic meter. The name of the derived density unit is Rho. While the formula for density is ρ= /V.

Frequency

Frequency is a derived quantity that states there will be vibrations or repeated loops per event in seconds or can be written like (s ^–1 ). The derived unit of frequency is often referred to as Hertz. The formula for frequency is 1/{period(t)} or f = 1/t . In general, the magnitude of the frequency derivative is often used to calculate sound vibrations.

Electrical charge

Electric charge is included in the derived quantity. Electric charge is a derived quantity that has units of Coulombs. The amount of charge drop can be calculated by means of indirect measurements and the formula for the amount of charge is I = Q/t. You can find derived quantities in physics.

Electrical voltage

Voltage is one type of derived quantity that is usually used to calculate differences in electric voltage. We often use the derived unit of this voltage in the electrical field, namely the Volt (V). Meanwhile, the formula for electric voltage is V = I. R.

Electrical resistance

Electrical resistance is a derived quantity that is closely related to electricity. The unit of electrical resistance is the ohm unit. The derived electrical resistance has a formula, namely R = V / I.

Wide

Area is a derived quantity derived from the principal quantity length. While the area value is obtained by multiplying the length and width (pxl). The unit used in the derived area is the cubic meter (m ² ). This area formula is usually used to calculate the area of ​​a flat shape or a two-dimensional shape.

Volume

Volume is a derived quantity derived from the principal quantity length, resulting in a volume formula that is length multiplied by width multiplied by the height of an object. After calculating the volume, the derived volume unit is the cubic meter (m ³ ). The volume derived quantity is in mathematics lessons in the field of geometric shapes or three-dimensional shapes.

Pressure

Pressure is a derived quantity that is derived from the derived force with the derived area or if it is written as N/m2. The formula for the derived quantity is P = F / A. The derived quantity, which is the derivative of the magnitude of the force, is often found in physics.

https://cdn.sinaumedia.com/uploads/items/9789796925469.jpg

Characteristics of Derivative Magnitudes

In order for you to understand more deeply in the discussion of derived quantities, you need to know the characteristics of derived quantities. There are two characteristics of derived quantities, namely more than one unit and can be calculated directly and indirectly.

1. More Than One Unit

For each derived quantity, the units are generally more than one or the units may also be a combination of several principal quantities. For example, the derived quantity of speed where the units are derived from the principal quantity of length (meters) and the principal quantity of time (seconds or seconds ). Therefore, when you want to calculate the magnitude of the speed derivative, the formula is speed (v) = length or distance traveled (s): time (t).

In addition, there are also derived quantities that have more than two units, namely the derived quantities of force. In terms of derived force, the unit used is Newton (N) where the base unit is kg . m/s ² .

2. Can be counted directly and indirectly

As previously discussed, definite derived quantities can be calculated. In fact, derived quantities can appear in everyday life or in a problem. Therefore, we can calculate the derived quantity by using a measuring device or simply using a formula.

The use of measuring devices in calculating derived quantities is called direct measurement and the use of measuring devices when calculating derived quantities is called indirect measurement. For example, when you want to measure the volume of a drinking bottle, the volume can be found by measuring each part on the surface of the glass one by one or you can also use the volume formula.

Derivative Measurement Tool

One of the characteristics of derived quantities is that they can be calculated by indirect measurements or calculated using measuring devices. This derived quantity has a special measuring tool to find out the value of the derived quantity without using a formula. Measuring instrument derived quantities, namely:

1. Dynamometer

A dynamometer is a special tool that can function to calculate the size of the force that exists on an object. When used, the dynamometer will apply the spring force method.

2. Calorimeter

The calorimeter is a type of derivative measuring instrument used to measure the amount of heat that occurs in a chemical change or reaction.

3. Ohm Meters

Ohm meter is a derivative measurement tool that functions to calculate the electrical resistance that exists in objects related to electricity.

4. Speedometer

Speedometer is a type of derivative measurement tool that is usually used when calculating speed. We often find speedometers in motorcycles, cars, and so on.

5.Hygrometers

Hygrometer is a measuring instrument for measuring the amount of derivative to calculate the humidity of the air in a room. This derived measurement tool can be said to be quite easy to use, so meluas can apply it easily.

6. Barometer

The barometer is a derivative measurement tool that is generally used to calculate the amount of air pressure that exists. Therefore, the barometer is usually used when predicting the weather.

Conclusion

Derived quantities are quantities that are derived from the principal quantities, so there can be more than one unit in the derived quantities. Therefore, it can be said that the derived quantities are a combination of the basic quantities and the derived quantities themselves. In addition, derived quantities can be calculated or measured using direct measurements (with tools) and indirect measurements (without measuring devices or with formulas).

Source: From various sources

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

Deregulation – When a policy has been officially passed, it will not be long before the policy will begin to be tested or enforced in the public. Even though it has gone through a rigorous formulation and analysis process, sometimes a policy experiences discrepancies in the field. This often happens because many external factors affect its implementation.

Input, criticism, and suggestions that arise during the implementation of a regulation or policy will be accommodated by the institution or party that issued it. Various solutions will be formulated to find a way out of the discrepancy. This is the process of a policy change.

One of the steps that can be taken so that the implementation of a regulation provides or receives maximum benefits is through deregulation. Deregulation is one part of policy change. Usually, the originator of the regulations will eliminate several points of the regulations that are considered inappropriate, inefficient or burdensome. This process is then called deregulation.

Definition of Deregulation

The term deregulation is closely related to economic activity. The reason is because deregulation is often carried out on regulations related to the economy. In other words, deregulation decisions depart from the economic situation and will also have an impact on economic activity.

According to Erwin P. Geiger in the book Privatization and Deregulation: Needed Policy Reforms for Agribusiness Development , deregulation is eliminating all unnecessary rules or all redundant rules and regulations that are proven to impede or slow down productive economic activities. Erwin considers that the majority of regulations originating from a centralized economy refer to development theory. The theory of economic development emphasizes the evidence of the success and failure of economic development in countries that are currently carrying out economic development.

Unfortunately, regulations based on this theory of development often lead to market failures. Many of these regulations close doors or economic opportunities thereby ignoring or inhibiting market forces.

As a result, the government adopted more regulations, hoping to regulate the economy the way politicians wanted it to. This resulted in hampered economic activity. Whereas the market economy is a pillar for the economic growth and prosperity of a country. To create a productive market system, many pre-made regulations must be eliminated.

Deregulation is the consequence of a critical reassessment of existing regulations. The form or action taken in a deregulation depends on the nature of the market, for example changing or liberalizing price controls, controlling both domestic and international markets, or redefining competition policies for deregulated markets.

Deregulation and its Implications

Basically, humans cannot live without rules. In fact, we recognize that rules are necessary for markets to function properly. The market economy is a system that must be developed and preserved with great care. Because complete neglect can also lead to economic collapse and market failure. However, the very dynamic development of the times demands that all regulations or policies be formulated that do not conflict with the principle of freedom.

These regulations are often based on legal requirements which are then expanded and reinterpreted by bureaucrats. Often they become redundant, unnecessary, even obsolete. Such rules often have implications for:

1. Increase fees or rates charged to individuals and companies.

Complex regulations will certainly require extra performance to implement them. This results in a large use of time and energy. The costs incurred by business actors—both individuals and companies—are also increasing because they have to implement policies that are not lean.

2. Increase the burden on state administration.

Not only business people, the state will also suffer losses if it has to apply multiple layers of policies. The administrative process carried out will certainly burden the state because it requires additional time and effort.

3. The creation of distortions in the market.

Market distortion is a situation when the market experiences an imbalance. From the point of view of deregulation, market distortions occur due to the creation of unhealthy or uncompetitive markets due to policies that are usually burdensome for small business actors. In this condition, only business actors who are well-established or have large capital can access the market and even dominate the market.

4. Inhibit and reduce competition.

Referring to the previous explanation, if deregulation is not carried out, it will be impossible to create a competitive market. The large costs incurred to implement regulations—taking care of business licensing for example—will be burdensome for small entrepreneurs. The market will also be dominated by big business players and usually old players.

5. Prevent people from starting businesses.

Not only is it a matter of cost, convoluted regulations will also discourage novice businessmen for reasons of time and effort. Even though they have adequate capital, the long duration of time is also another obstacle for prospective business people. Likewise the problem of resources which often becomes an obstacle when a prospective businessman is required to invest time and energy to take care of business licensing that is not one door.

Under these threats, it is difficult for investment and long-term expansion to take place. This obstacle is also very detrimental to economic growth. To overcome this situation, the government needs to simplify regulations, reduce or eliminate them.

The aim was to rationalize formal requirements, eliminate duplication and allow easier access to new markets and economic activities, as well as limit state interference. This action does not mean the abolition of all regulations and controls, but selection through evaluation of regulations based on predetermined rationalizations.

The Exception Principle in Deregulation

There is a rationalization shift towards a rule that previously started from the premise that everything is prohibited unless expressly permitted, shifting to the principle that all activities are permitted to be carried out, unless there are rules that expressly prohibit it. In the case of a market economy, certain regulations are still needed to ensure the continuity of the market because the market functions imperfectly. In addition, the market is also demanded to be free from regulations that create obstacles for economic activity.

Even so, there are several exception principles that can be ignored in a deregulation process. This can mean that regulations become stronger, stricter, even more explicit as awareness of the following exclusions increases:

• Protection of human health (control of food);
• Public safety and security;
• Protection of the environment; And
• Uphold quality standards.

In certain cases, the regulations concerning these principles are far more detailed and detailed. All rules and exceptions must reflect the country’s established laws and international agreements. In many countries, deregulation needs to be accompanied by the abolition of privileges and exclusions that concern the interests of many people.

To determine which regulations will be automatically evaluated, the criterion is to eliminate all regulations that are not essential to the public interest. Likewise, regulations that are maintained or tightened must be related to the public interest. Again, deregulation must represent a general administration principle.

Rules in Deregulation

The following are general rules that should be applied when re-evaluating regulations.

1. Eliminate excessive formalism.

Deregulation can also occur when the formal requirements that employers must comply with become less demanding. Formalism is often a complaint or obstacle to many regulations in Indonesia. When applying for a permit, we often have to go through complicated procedures because we adjust to existing regulations. In fact, some procedures should be simplified or skipped. For this reason, deregulation is needed to cut regulations that are too formal but not essential.

2. Eliminate unreasonable deadlines for requirements.

There is a waiting time that is often applied to some regulations. This time duration is often considered unreasonable because it is too long to distract from the target or focus on the needs of other things. Deregulation needs to simplify waiting times so that efficiency, especially in managing business, can be realized.

3. Set rules for “administrative silence”.

This last point means that an application or registration document can be considered automatically approved if the competent authority does not respond within a certain time.

In order to ensure that progress is being made in these areas, the government needs to establish special oversight commissions, for example the Commission to Promote Competition established in Venezuela and Costa Rica.

Purpose of Deregulation

There are several goals that can be achieved from deregulation.

1. Resource Efficiency

By deregulating, the state will eliminate regulations that are considered burdensome to support a more competitive market for companies. This will support the efficiency of resources so as to open or increase competitiveness. Creating healthy competition will also have an impact on developing product innovation and reducing prices.

2. Opening Business Doors for Newcomers

Various obstacles or obstacles in opening a business will fall during the deregulation process. Newcomers can be more intrigued or motivated to enter the business world if the requirements are simple.

3. Creating Multiple Choices for Consumers

Deregulation opened up healthy competition for companies in the market. They will compete with each other to create competitive products both in price and quality. This happened because deregulation also resulted in shorter work processes and cost savings for companies so that funds could be allocated to increase the selling power of products. Consumers also benefit from a competitive market because it provides a wide choice of products and services.

4. Open Freedom for Companies in Competitive Markets

Deregulation is closely related to eliminating or reducing state intervention in the financial sector, including in services, markets and/or products. This gives companies the freedom to determine strategies or business processes to obtain maximum profits.

5. Strengthening the National Economy

The requirement to become a developed country is to achieve an entrepreneurial ratio of at least 4 percent of the total population. The entrepreneurial ratio is important for a country because business is one of the factors that can strengthen the national economy. If consistent deregulation is carried out, many economic opportunities will open up, especially from the business sector, such as financing, capital or investment.

Disadvantages of Deregulation

Deregulation can also cause several disadvantages if it is carried out without supervision and is too massive.

1. Decreased Product Quality

There is a tendency for companies to continue to be able to optimize profits from the business they manage. Meanwhile, companies are given the freedom to innovate in creating products that can win the hearts of consumers by creating a competitive market. Because it saves production costs, the process of producing goods or services often ignores crucial elements that can result in a decrease in commodity quality.

2. Lack of Protection for Consumers, Employees, and the Environment

The less government intervention in market sustainability, the less supervision and protection of consumers. The main cause is the difficulty that the government has in controlling all businesses. This occurs because of an imbalance between the number of human resources in government and ongoing business.

3. There is potential for consumer losses

To be able to obtain maximum profit, companies or business people often eliminate important elements to cut costs. Without strict supervision from the government, consumers have the potential to be harmed by products that do not meet standards.

4. Employee Safety Risk

Not only consumers, cost savings also often make a company ignore employee safety. Establishing and ensuring safe work patterns for workers clearly requires extra costs and maintenance costs.

5. Threat of Environmental Damage

Efforts to make maximum profits also often have a bad impact on the environment. For example, to decompose factory waste or at least guarantee a sustainable disposal system, of course, requires a lot of money. Minimal government oversight resulted in the threat of environmental damage.

6. Open Space for Fraudulent, Predatory Activities, or Illegal Business

Nowadays, it is common for us to encounter news related to fraud suffered by consumers. This is one of the impacts that often occurs as a result of loosening regulations by the government. The difficulty of controlling every existing line of business opens up opportunities for fraud—such as trading in imitation products—which has the potential to harm consumers. Apart from that, deregulation also opened the door for illegal business to enter; drug trafficking, modern slavery, online loan services (financial loans) that do not meet the requirements, etc.

Conclusion

Deregulation has become a popular trend or phenomenon carried out by governments in both developed and developing countries in order to build a solid economic foundation. The main reason is to create a competitive business climate. This is because a strong economy must be supported by healthy business continuity. The market does need to be protected by regulations, but the government must also guarantee freedom for business actors in establishing market mechanisms.

Just like other decisions taken by the government, deregulation also proved to have negative and positive impacts. Measurable deregulation can provide benefits to the business climate. Not only creating a competitive market, deregulation also led to efficiency in the market. Deregulation also supports the opening of various economic opportunities that may come from both within the country and abroad.

Even so, deregulation must be carried out with great care, with careful calculation and planning. This is because excessive deregulation will actually have a negative impact on the business climate and other external instruments that accompany a business.

Apart from that, there is an exception principle that the government must also keep in mind when deregulating. Basically, the evaluation that is applied to a regulation must think about the interests of the people or the general public. Reduction of regulations must not harm the public and must benefit the public. The same principle also applies when the government wants to maintain or tighten a rule.

One of the steps the government can take in carrying out deregulation is not to relax its supervision of the continuity of the market. The government also needs to form a special commission to guarantee fair business competition. Through this unit, the government can launch a complaint service if the public finds fraud or fraud that causes losses.

Author: Anendya Niervana

 

Social Control – In living side by side with other people in the midst of a community environment where the importance and need for social control in the community. If there is no social control then various things can happen such as robberies, fights, or even murder which can harm the environment and the people in it.

However, what is the true meaning of social control itself? Consider the following information regarding social control which is one of the efforts to prevent social deviations from occurring both individually and in society together.

The Definition of Social Control

The definition of social control based on the Ministry of Education and Culture’s website or the Ministry of Education and Culture is a mechanism used to direct community members in an environment to carry out the values ​​and social norms that apply in it.

According to sociologist Peter L. Berger, the definition of social control is all the ways that are used by society to regulate or regulate members in the community when they disobey. In addition, Joseph S. Roucek also defines social control as a collective term that refers to planned processes.

Where each individual is persuaded, encouraged or even forced to be able to adjust to the habits and values ​​of life that exist in a community group. Bruce J. Cohen who is a sociologist in his understanding of social control as various ways used to encourage every individual in a community to have behavior in line with the will of that community group.

Robert MZ Lawang defines social control as any means used by a community to return or help perpetrators of social deviance to return to a good path.

Social control according to Karel J. Veeger is a continuation of a socialization process that is carried out and has a relationship with various ways and methods used to encourage each individual to have thoughts and behaviors that are in harmony with the community group and the community environment in which they are located.

Based on the various definitions put forward by these experts, it can be concluded that social control is a process that is owned or used by a person or a group with the aim of influencing, inviting, or even forcing other members to instill within themselves the values ​​and norms that apply in society. that’s where they are.

The Purpose of Social Control

After understanding what social control is, there are several reasons why it exists in a society.

• Reducing social deviant behavior that may be carried out by someone, with the inculcation of values ​​and norms, someone will understand not to do things that can harm themselves and others.
• Creating peace and harmony in living side by side in the community, with awareness in each individual community, the risks of social deviation will be minimized thereby creating peace in an environment.
• Make the offender able to realize the mistakes he made and want to improve himself and his behavior towards others.
• Make the perpetrators of social deviance have the awareness to comply with the values ​​and norms that exist and apply in the community.
• Making people understand and instill within themselves the values ​​and norms that exist both self-consciously and under coercion or encouragement from various factors.

 

Characteristics of Social Control

Social control that exists in a community environment itself has various characteristics that we can find, as follows.

• The first feature of social control is having a method or technique used to control the people in that environment.
• The second characteristic of social control is having the goal of achieving a balance between stability and the changes that are taking place in the community.
• The third feature of social control is that it is usually carried out by a group of people against the individual concerned or other groups within a community.
• The fourth feature of social control is that it has a two-way system and is often not realized by the parties concerned.

Types of Social Control

Based on the implementation time, the types of social control can be divided into two, namely preventive social control and representative social control which are explained as follows.

1. Preventive social control

The first type of social control based on the implementation time is preventive social control which is a control that occurs in the community environment prior to the existence or occurrence of deviant behavior.

This preventive social control is usually carried out by someone through socialization regarding existing norms, education of the surrounding community, community counseling, as well as providing advice and consequences so that social deviations do not occur.

2. Repressive social control

The second type of social control based on the implementation time is repressive social control which is a control that occurs in a community environment after deviant behavior occurs in society.

This repressive social control itself is usually in the form of an effort that is carried out through giving consequences for those who violate it, commensurate punishment, advice and counseling so that they don’t repeat it again and are aware that this is a mistake. Based on the implementing officer, the types of social control can also be divided into two, namely, formal control and informal control.

3. Formal control

The first type of social control based on its implementing officers is formal control which is usually carried out by various official institutions that formally proclaim rules and values ​​and norms in an existing environment.

In general, the rules as well as the values ​​and norms that exist in the formal control environment are made in writing and there are already applicable standards in them. We can see formal control in several environments, such as the corporate environment, trade union associations, and existing judicial institutions.

4. Informal control

The second type of social control based on its implementing officers is informal control which is usually made in a community group that has an unofficial nature and rules or values ​​and norms that exist are not written.

We can generally see informal controls in everyday life, such as when we gather with family or with friends. This informal control is also generally unplanned and occurs spontaneously. For example, when we get together with friends and play a game.

When someone commits fraud, that person will be ridiculed. This is a form of informal control. Based on its nature, the types of social control can also be divided into two, namely, curative social control and participatory social control.

5. Curative social control

The first type of social control based on its nature is curative social control which is a form of social control carried out through various coaching and healing to perpetrators of social deviance to change the values ​​and norms that exist in them. We can see curative social control through the rehabilitation given to users of illegal drugs or drugs and alcoholic beverages.

6. Participatory social control

The second type of social control based on its nature is participatory social control which is a form of social control carried out by inviting or involving perpetrators of social deviance who have changed themselves to help improve the values ​​and norms of other perpetrators of social deviance.

 

Social Control Function

The following are some of the functions of the existence of social control in the midst of the community environment. Check out the following information.

The first function of social control is to reinforce existing societal beliefs about social values ​​and norms. With the cultivation and strengthening of this belief, it can directly affect the sustainability of the existing social order. The way that can be done to strengthen this belief is through various institutions such as schools, families, and through suggestions from the social environment.

The second function of social control is to provide rewards to each party that is able to comply with the values ​​and social norms that apply to society. What is meant by reward here is giving praise, respect, and giving gifts to members of the community. The purpose of giving these rewards is for everyone to continue to carry out the existing values ​​and norms and to set an example for other members to be even better.

The third function of social control is to develop inner shame. What is meant is when someone who is a perpetrator of social deviance is aware of his mistakes, he will be ashamed to admit his mistakes and his self-esteem will drop. In addition, the consequences for the perpetrators of social deviance such as reproaches or negative comments coming from the community will make them feel ashamed and deterred. That way, the person will have a sense of shame so that in the future they will not commit social deviance again.

The fourth function of social control is to develop fear within. When someone has a fear of doing an act or thing that can pose a risk of getting consequences, indirectly it will make him aware to avoid these things. With that fear, he will try to do good things and avoid things that are at risk of harming himself and others.

The fifth function of social control is to create a legal system in a society. In order for a common goal or agreement to be achieved in an environment, it is necessary to have values ​​and norms that apply to regulate every member of the community in it. With this legal system, which contains rules and consequences that can be accepted by any social deviant behavior, people will be aware not to do this if they do not want to be rewarded for their actions.

Forms of Social Control

In people’s lives, there are various forms of social control that can be done or seen. The following are some forms of social control.

1. Gossip

The first form of social control is gossip or what is often referred to as rumor, which is a behavior of exchanging information carried out by someone without clear concrete evidence regarding an event or negative behavior.

2. Reprimand

The second form of social control is a warning that is generally carried out by a person or a group of perpetrators of social deviations that can disturb the harmony of the community environment. By doing this, a person provides direct and open criticism so that the perpetrators of these social deviations can immediately be aware of the mistakes they have made.

3. Sanctions

The third form of social control is sanctions or punishments given to people who commit social deviant behavior. As an example in everyday life, when we go to school and someone is reprimanded for cheating on a test, the score given is immediately zero. That way he becomes aware of being afraid and not doing that again. This form of sanction itself also has two benefits, namely, helping a person to be aware of the socially deviant behavior he has committed, and being a warning or reminder for other members of society not to make the same mistake.

4. Education

The fourth form of social control is education, where the higher the education a person has, the better understanding of existing values ​​and norms, and being able to practice them in real situations and help bring change to the community environment.

5. Religion

The fifth form of social control is religion, in which religion teaches everyone to maintain good relations with one another, with other creatures, and also with those in power. In religious teachings, there are also various prohibitions and orders to stay away from negative things that can become social deviations, because one day they will be subject to sanctions.

Means of Social Control

Here are some ways that can be done to exercise social control in a community environment.

1. Persuasive Social Control

The first method used to exercise social control is to use persuasion. Where by using this method, there is no violence against the perpetrators of social deviance but the methods used are advising, giving appeals and guiding so as not to commit deviant behavior in the future. Persuasive methods are usually carried out in the community through verbal or symbolic forms in the form of banners, posters or public service advertisements distributed to members of the public.

2. Coercive Social Control

The second way used to exercise social control is to use coercive means. Where by using this method, there is coercion or violence against the perpetrators of social deviations both physically and psychologically. This is often done by the authorities when they have no other way to bring the perpetrators to their senses.

However, using this method often results in consequences such as negative reactions from other parties. One example that we can see is the expulsion and control of street vendors or street vendors selling on main roads which often make the streets narrow and cause traffic jams. Because of this, the patrolling police often warned them to move, but they were ignored until they finally used this coercive method.

3. Socialization

The third method used to exercise social control is to use socialization. Where by using this method, community members are taught to create a habit and instill in themselves the values ​​and norms that apply in a community environment. This method is carried out through outreach to the surrounding community, by introducing existing norms and values ​​and their application to attitudes and behavior in everyday life in society.

4. Social Emphasis

The fourth way used to exercise social control is through social suppression. Where by using this method, it is expected to be able to control the behavior of every member of the environment in it. By doing this, it is hoped that a community environment can instill in the values ​​and norms that exist in each individual so that they can coexist well.

5. Preventive social control

namely prevention before deviations from the norms and values ​​of society occur. For example, parents who forbid their children from hanging out with friends who like to gamble. This is so that his son does not become a gambler later.

6. Repressive social control

namely efforts to restore the situation after deviations in the values ​​and norms of society. For example, someone who breaks a promise is reported to court, so the judge imposes a penalty by paying debts and fines.

 

Understanding Turnover – Turnover is one of the important points in the world of business and business as it is known to be closely related to profit or income. Turnover is often used as a reference or measure of success achieved by a business.

If Sinaumed’s is an active person in business calculations, he must be aware that income in business can be categorized into two, namely gross income and net income.

Turnover as gross income. Income that has not been deducted by various costs and expenses in the business. In other words, pure income from the sale of products or goods.

Definition of Turnover

In simple terms, turnover is all the money obtained from the sale of goods or products in a business in a certain period. This period or period of time can be in daily, monthly, to yearly terms.

This amount of income is still gross, not yet deducted by payment of expenses or other costs in the business. Costs or expenses in business, including building rental costs, operational costs, employee salaries, electricity costs, marketing costs to cleaning fees. Therefore, turnover is better known as gross income.

Many business people are trying to continue to increase their turnover because the greater the turnover, the greater the profit. In fact, a large turnover does not guarantee that.

Sinaumed’s can have a large turnover but still book a net loss if it turns out that the cash outflow is greater than the cash inflow to your business. All records in detail will be seen through the income statement in the business accounting calculations.

Turnover is also often used by business people to measure profits or the level of success achieved, even though that’s not the concept. The method of calculating turnover cannot be used as a benchmark or reference in this matter. Because, it does not yet provide a definite picture of the net income generated.

Definition of turnover from various sources:

1. Chaniago: turnover from sales is the total amount of income that comes from the sale of goods or services within a certain period of time.
2. Businessdictionary: turnover is the overall income from the sale of a product of a company without any reduction in costs within a certain period. Turnover is also known as gross income.
3. Investopedia: turnover has another term, namely revenue, which means income from normal business operations. This includes discounts and reductions on returned items.

The Benefits of Knowing the Amount of Turnover Obtained

As a business owner, of course, Sinaumed’s must know how much turnover he can generate in a certain period. There are several benefits that can be obtained by knowing the amount of turnover, namely:

1. You can understand the quality and productivity of the business you are running

If the turnover is high, it means that the quality and productivity of your business are in good numbers. Conversely, if your turnover is still low, there may be a problem with the quality and service of your business.

2. You can adjust business expenses

When turnover is high, it may still be possible to make other expenses besides costs and expenses. However, when your business turnover is low, you can choose to control expenses so that you still get profit/net income.

3. You can learn to prepare profit and loss reports well

To find out exactly how much the nominal turnover is, you need to compile and make a profit and loss report. Recording a good income statement will show accurate calculation results.

Meanwhile, the purpose of turnover is to determine the ability of a business to sell its goods or products within a certain period. By knowing this, business owners can take steps to increase turnover in the future.

In addition, the purpose of turnover is also to assess the scale of the business. Whether the business being run is a small business or a large business, it can be seen from the total product sales figures.

Then, how do you find out the amount of turnover obtained? Of course by knowing the formula for calculating sales turnover.

The Difference between Turnover and Profit

If turnover is gross income, then profit is defined as net income. In other words, profit is turnover that has been reduced by all calculations of expenses, costs and debts that must be paid. Because the value is net, profit is also often referred to as net or net profit.

Many of them consider the two things to be the same. Even though the meaning is clearly different. Profit is something that can be used as a reference or the main benchmark for assessing a profitable business. A high profit figure can mean that the business being run is in accordance with what consumers want.

Profit also has a different purpose than turnover. The profit objectives are as follows:

1. As a source for the company’s reserve fund to meet the company’s investment, development and emergency fund needs.
2. As a source of funds to pay the company’s debt.
3. As a source of funds to finance operational costs and raw materials.

Tips to Increase Turnover

The term in the business world that the higher the turnover, the higher the profit that will be obtained. However, in practice to increase the number of turnover is not easy. There are several steps that can be taken to increase business turnover, including:

1. Prioritizing quality and innovation of the products sold

Product quality is the most important thing to increase sales. By producing quality and innovative products, consumers will not hesitate to buy and use your products.

Meanwhile, innovation is necessary for the smooth running of your business, you know. An innovation in business is absolutely necessary in order to compete in the world with competitors.

Innovation is a way to produce a new product with a new method or a new design that is better than an old product that has or has never been marketed. Innovation can also be caused by market demand for new items with different functions.

By having quality and innovative products, it is certain that consumers will come by themselves. If this is accompanied by a good marketing strategy, the increased turnover value can be achieved easily.

2. Providing the best service for consumers

Giving a good impression to consumers is very important. A good impression can make consumers buy the products we have again. So it takes the nature of friendliness and approach to consumers.

Consumers buy the products offered because they are driven by a need or desire that must be fulfilled. No matter how much money they spend, no matter what products they buy, they have the right to get the best service. If they feel let down, they will not hesitate to disgrace your store and business in front of many people.

3. Holding exclusive promotions

One of the tips for increasing turnover in a business that is considered quite effective is to hold various types of promotions. Promotion that is considered quite effective in this case is to create a product package or bundle.

Buying a product package or bundle automatically makes consumers buy in large quantities. This product package aims to make consumers buy our products more than one product. For example, bundling packages, frugal packages, premium packages or packages for certain moments such as Ramadan, Christmas, or Valentine’s Day. The more products sold, the more turnover you get.

In addition, it can also provide offers that can increase consumer satisfaction, such as in a customer loyalty program. Consumers can also feel Sinaumed’s’ efforts to appreciate their loyalty.

4. Expanding the market

Expanding the market can be done in several ways. First, you can open a new outlet or branch elsewhere. With the new outlets, it is hoped that sales figures will also increase which will automatically help increase sales turnover.

Second, by exploring the world of business digitalization. Many business people are starting to switch to digital business by leveraging the power of social media and marketplaces which will gain many benefits. Not only that, by marketing merchandise online, the market reach will be wider, the products you offer can be seen by more and more consumers in different places.

By entering the world of business digitization, you can also get other conveniences as a form of benefit from marketplace integration.

5. Develop a comprehensive sales strategy

Most companies do not have a sales strategy that defines their competitive advantage and differentiation plan. So the way is done by preparing and developing a comprehensive sales strategy. As well as increasing turnover, it can also address competitive threats and lay out the path to maximizing profitability.

6. Placing resources on jobs that will generate the highest returns

By aligning teams to maximize their productivity they can generate significant sales gains.

7. Improving lead quality

This is done to accelerate the acquisition rate of new customers. Steps that can be taken is to provide high quality leads to sales representatives.

8. Institute an effective sales training program

This way by holding an effective training program. It is critical to invest in improving the quality and skills of the sales force including ensuring they understand the product knowledge to meet changing demands. Without adequate training, potential sales performance will be left behind and will not be able to maximize sales revenue growth.

9. Identify the most effective sales and spread them throughout the sales team

By sharing tips on the most effective sales process that can be carried out by the entire sales team. Find out what the top performers in your company and competitors are doing behind their success, then share these tactics and habits with the entire sales team.

10. Apply more effective sales techniques

Apart from learning from the experience of a successful sales process, it is also necessary to know the specific problems or obstacles faced by the sales team. By knowing the solution to every problem or obstacle in sales, your team can apply more effective sales techniques and can ultimately drive an increase in sales turnover.

11. Collaborate

Collaborating can help us reach the market, reduce risk and make the company’s product offerings more relevant. Consider the gamut from partnerships, vendors, strategic to sales consulting firms that can expand market reach.

12. Integrate multichannel sales efforts

Finally, the way to increase turnover is to realign sales resources to increase efficiency. Multichannel sales offer products through several platforms, not just one, for example through marketplaces, social media, websites and so on.

The formula for calculating turnover

Turnover is a nominal income that has not been deducted by fees and expenses that must be paid. Therefore, it can be concluded that the formula for calculating turnover by only calculating the total products sold multiplied by the selling price.

Turnover = Number of Products x Selling Price

An example of how to calculate turnover in a simple way is:

Toko Aneka Jaya, which sells leather handicraft products, was able to sell 100 pairs of leather shoes within one month in January 2022. The selling price for a pair of shoes is Rp. 300,000.

So, how to calculate the sales turnover of Toko Aneka Jaya is:

Number of products x selling price
100 x 300,000 = 30,000,000

So, the turnover of Toko Aneka Jaya in January 2022 is Rp. 30,000,000.

How to calculate sales turnover using the general formula for calculating monthly turnover. Business people will calculate how much gross income they generate with this formula.

How to Calculate Turnover Percentage

How to calculate the turnover percentage is usually used by business people to compare the amount of their gross income from one period to another.

Example of how to calculate turnover percentage:

The Alya Frozen Food store is able to sell 150 packs of chicken nuggets in November 2021. In December 2021, the number of sales of nugget products has increased to 200 packs. The price for nuggets is Rp. 25,000 per pack.

If you want to see it in the form of a percentage case, then the way to calculate the turnover percentage is:

Percentage = (End – Beginning) / Beginning x 100%
Beginning = November sales 150
End = December sales 200
= (200 – 150)/ 150 x 100%
= 50/ 100 x 100%
= 0.5 x 100%
= 50%

So, the difference in the increase in Alyan Frozen Store’s turnover is 50%.

How to Calculate Annual Sales Turnover

Because turnover as gross income has not been deducted by many other costs. So the method of calculating annual sales turnover is quite easy, although it does not fully give an overview of the profits.

How to calculate sales turnover per year, can be formulated like this:

Turnover = Number of Products x Jaul Price x 12 months

For example :

An MSMEs engaged in selling souvenirs are able to sell 250 key chain products in one month. Each key chain is priced at Rp. 10,000.

Turnover earned in a year:

Turnover = 250 x 10,000 x 12
= 250,000 x 12
= IDR 30,000,000

So, by calculating the sales turnover per year, the MSMEs are expected to get a turnover of Rp. 30,000,000 in a one-year sales period.

It can be said that how to calculate turnover per month can be done first before Sinaumed’s calculates your product sales turnover in a year.

This is an explanation about turnover and how to calculate it. If Sinaumed’s still needs references regarding turnover, then you can visit the sinaumedia book collection at sinaumedia.com. sinaumedia always provides the best and most complete information for Sinaumed’s because you have #MoreWithReading information.

Understanding Tone Intervals – Music is one of the elements that is very inherent in our daily lives. Music is like a mandatory menu that we are sure to find on our plates. Wherever we are, we are bound to hear music; in shopping centers, on public transportation, or even we consciously choose to listen to it through our electronic devices.

Music also has a long history. Almost no human civilization has escaped music. Every human activity, both social and cultural, is tied to music. This fact proves that music has an important role in human life.

However, music is not something simple. It consists of several tones arranged in such a way as to be familiar or acceptable to the human ear. Of course, this is a step that is not simple. That’s why of the many songs released in the world, there are only a handful that get the title of best recording, best seller, or best song every year.

One of the crucial things that must be done by musicians or song composers is to adjust the distance between one note and another. This is the so-called tone interval.

As a work of art, music has a series of pitch intervals which are the creative process of the musicians involved behind it. Not only the work of the brain, the tone intervals in music certainly combine the feelings of the creator.

The following is a further explanation of tone intervals.

 

Know Music

Music or song is a work that is produced from complex sounds. The following is a basic theory that needs to be known in music according to Harry Sulastianto in the book Arts and Culture .

1. Sound

According to Irwandy in the book Metal Science , sound is an elastic vibration of air that can be heard. Not only comes from the human esophagus, the sounds contained in music can also come from the sounds produced by musical instruments. There are several important aspects contained in sound such as tuning, intensity, duration, and timbre.

2. Tone

According to Yoyok RM and Siswandi in the book Cultural Arts Education 1 SMP, tone is the main element in music which is understood as the highness and lowness of the sound. Music or song is a product that is produced from tones that are joined in the arrangement of scales.

There are a number of tones that we have known and used for centuries. The most familiar tones are for example in the form of not do, re, mi, fa, sol, la, si, do or also called diatonic scales. In other situations, the notes are also written as c, d, e, f, g, a, b, c.

The following are terms in the arrangement of tones in a music or song.

a. Tone series

According to Hendri Hartanto in the book Quick and Easy Ways to Master Middle School Physics , a series of tones is a sequence of tones according to the magnitude of the frequency.

b. Musical scale

Unlike the case with rhythm which is related to the duration or certain period of time when a note is played, scales are related to the high and low notes in a series of sounds. According to J. Julia, et al in the book Development of Digital-Based Music Learning Media for Elementary Schools , scales are levels of tonal sounds based on their frequency. Scales can also be defined as the basic tone arrangement of a tone system. There are two types of scales that we usually know, namely, diatonic scales and pentatonic scales.

• Diatonic scales
  Diatonic scales contain a series of seven basic notes in one octave, so that when the sequence of seven notes is played, it will repeat when it reaches the end. The distance between one note and the next in a diatonic scale is usually one and a half.
  Furthermore, diatonic scales are divided into two, namely major diatonic scales and minor diatonic scales. Major diatonic scales are usually found in songs with fast tempos or beats that give the impression of enthusiasm. Meanwhile, minor diatonic scales are often found in music with a sad nuance.
• Pentatonic scales
  Unlike the diatonic scales, pentatonic scales have only five basic notes in one octave. The pentatonic scale is further divided into two types, namely the slendro pentatonic scale and the pelog pentatonic scale. Both the pelog pentatonic scale and the slendro pentatonic scale have pleasant tonal characteristics. The difference lies in the distance between the notes, the pelog pentatonic scale has a large enough pitch distance. In contrast, the slendro pentatonic scale has a relatively small range of notes.
• Tone Interval
  If interpreted freely, then the interval means distance. Not much different from that definition, tone interval can be interpreted as the distance that separates one tone from another. The interval of a note is usually determined by its basic tone.

3. Rhythm

Referring to the book Smart to Play the Violin in 1 Day by Rhino Sanjaya, rhythm is an element of time in music that results from its duration and accents. Rhythm consists of a note value, which is a count or beat mark in a measure such as 1 beat, 2 beats, or 4 beats.

There are several beats that are commonly used, such as full notes, half notes, quarter notes, eighth notes, up to sixteenth notes. Full notes or whole notes mean that in one measure it is worth 4 beats. Meanwhile, a half note is worth 2 beats, while a quarter note is worth 1 beat. While the eighth note is worth half of 1 beat and the sixteenth note is worth half of the half beat.

4. Melody

Melody comes from the Greek word “meloidia” which means singing or shouting. Erlina in the article Between Rhythm and Melody defines melody as a series of tones that sound sequential and rhythmic and express an idea. According to Sahabuddin Mahganna in the book Olioreang: Rhythmic Entities and Mandar Melodies, melodies usually consist of one or more musical phrases or motifs, and are usually repeated in songs of various forms.

5. Notation

Notation is an instruction or description of an idea related to a piece of music as outlined in written form. Notation contains the desired tone arrangement musicians. However, these tones are represented in the form of notes. The standard notation that is usually found in a piece of music is block notation. Sometimes in a song notation lyrics are also included. Notations need to be made by a musician so that his work can be translated properly for both fellow musicians and lay people. For this reason, musicians must have the ability to read notation.

6. Harmony

According to Kanisius Jamalus in the book Teaching Music Through Musical Experience , harmony is the sound of a combination of two or more tones that differ in height and are heard simultaneously. However, a harmony in music can also occur if the notes are sounded in sequence.

According to Komang Mahardika, et al in the book Introduction to Chamber Music Works “Kacang Dari”, harmony in music is used as a strong accompaniment and support for the melody of a song. Harmonies play an important role in defining the notes in a melody in a notation. That way, the sound produced for a harmony must be precise in order to be able to represent the piece of music according to the expectations of the creator.

Definition of Tone Intervals

In a line of song or music, a note that leads to another takes a distance. This distance is called the tone interval. Referring to the book Vibrations and Waves by Yohanes Surya, pitch interval is the ratio of the frequency of a tone with a higher frequency to a tone with a lower frequency.

Launching from the Music Radar page, in Western music theory, when naming a musical interval, there are two things to consider: quality and distance or number. Quality refers to the type of interval (major, minor, perfect, etc.), whereas spacing refers to the number of notes recorded by the interval. These can be unison second, terts, quarts, quints, sects, septims, and octaves.

However, one thing that tends to confuse people is that the number of semitones spanned by an interval does not always correspond to the number in the name. To understand this, we need to look at the relationship between the degrees of the scale from which the two ends of the interval are taken.

 

 

Classification of Tone Intervals

There are several criteria that can be used as a differentiator or comparison between one interval and another.

1. Melody and harmony

Harmony intervals occur when two notes are heard simultaneously. Meanwhile, melodic intervals occur when two notes are heard in succession, either when a low note goes to a higher tone (up) or when a high note goes to a lower tone (down).

2. Diatonic and chromatic

The diatonic interval is the interval formed by the two notes of the diatonic scale. The chromatic interval is the non-diatonic interval formed by the two notes of the chromatic scale.

3. Consonants and dissonances

Consonant and dissonant are terms that refer to the stability or stagnation of certain musical effects. A dissonant interval is an interval that has tension and usually ends with a consonant interval in a piece of music or song.

4. Simple and compound

A single interval or also called a simple interval ( simple ) is an interval that spans at most one octave. Intervals that span more than one octave are called compound intervals , because they can be obtained by adding one or more octaves to a single interval.

5. Steps and skips

Linear intervals (melodies) can be described as steps or skips . A step or conjunction move is the linear interval between two successive notes of a scale. The larger intervals are called leaps (also called leaps ), or separate moves. In the diatonic scale, a step is one minor second (sometimes also called a half step) or major second (sometimes also called a whole step), with all intervals of a minor third or greater skipped.

In simpler terms, steps are smaller or narrower intervals in a musical line, and skips are wider or larger intervals, where the categorization of intervals into steps and skips is determined by the tuning system and tone space used.

6. Enharmonic

Two intervals are considered enharmonic or enharmonic equivalent if they contain the same note spelled differently; that is, if the notes in the two intervals are themselves enharmonic equivalent. The enharmonic interval includes the same number of semitones.

 

 

Tone interval type

The following are types of pitch intervals based on two categories according to Western music theory, namely number and quality.

1. Tone interval based on quality

a. Major

In the diatonic scale there are seven intervals for each interval number, each starting on a different note. The interval formed by the diatonic scale is called the diatonic interval. Except for unisons and octaves, diatonic intervals with a given interval number always occur in two measures, which differ by one semitone. If in a diatonic interval, some semitones are greater than other semitones, the greater semitone is called a major.

b. Minor

In contrast to major intervals, if in a series of diatonic intervals there are several smaller semitones, then these semitones are known as minor.

c. augmented

With the same number of intervals, an augmented interval is one semitone wider than a perfect or major interval. If one of the two versions is a perfect interval, the other widened interval is called augmented .

d. diminished

An interval is called a diminished interval if it is one semitone narrower than a perfect interval with the same number of intervals.

e. Perfect

The interval is called the perfect because it has traditionally been considered a perfect consonant, although in western classical music a perfect quart is sometimes considered a less than perfect consonance, when the function is contrapuntal. In the diatonic scale all unisons and octaves are called perfect. Most quarts and quints are also perfect, with five and seven semitones respectively.

2. Tone interval based on numbers

a. Unison

The unison interval, also known as a prim, is the distance between one note and the same note. An example is the transition from a do tone to a do tone. When written as a ratio, unison intervals are described as 1:1

b. Second

Seconde or second interval is the distance between one note to the tone above or below it. A second can also be referred to as a two-note interval.

c. Terts

The third note is the distance between one note and the third note or two notes above or below it. Terts can also be referred to as three-note intervals.

d. Quart

The distance between a note to a fourth note or three notes above or below it is called the quart interval. A quart can also be referred to as a four note interval.

e. Quint

The distance between a note to the fifth note or four notes above or below it is called the quint interval. Quints can also be referred to as five-note intervals.

f. sect

The distance between a note to the sixth note or five notes above or below it is called the sect interval. Sects can also be referred to as six-tone intervals.

g. Septim

The distance between a note to the seventh note or six notes above or below it is called the septim interval. Septims can also be referred to as seven-note intervals.

h. Octave

The distance between a note to the eighth or seven notes above or below it is called the octave interval. Octave can also be referred to as an interval of eight notes.

That is the meaning of pitch intervals and various things related to pitch intervals that we need to understand. Sinaumed’s can read books related to music at sinaumedia.com . As #Friends Without Limits, sinaumedia always provides the best products so you have #MoreWithReading information.

Storyline is one of the intrinsic elements in a story. This flow element will be arranged through each existing stage. Starting from the introduction stage to the final stage of the story.

A story generally has two elements, namely intrinsic elements and extrinsic elements. The intrinsic element itself is easily an element that can help build directly contained in a work. Meanwhile, extrinsic elements are elements that build a work from the outside.

As explained in the initial paragraph, the intrinsic element of a literary work, such as a story, is the plot. When we were still in school, of course, we were introduced to the storyline.

So, do you still remember the meaning of the storyline? If you want to know more about the storyline, you can really read the explanation in this article. Because in this article, everything related to the storyline will be discussed in full.

Definition of Storyline

Before going deeper, it would be better if we also discussed the meaning of the storyline first. A story acupuncture is a series of events arranged in a coherent manner to form a complete story.

In addition, the storyline can also be referred to as a story plot that is able to make a story more complete. The storyline must be able to make readers of literary works have a sense of curiosity about what is in the story, so that it can make readers have their own curiosity to continue reading the literary work until it is finished.

Not only that, because the existence of a storyline in a literary work is also expected to be able to make readers more deeply into the contents and messages in the story. The storyline is also included in the group of intrinsic elements of literary works.

Each storyline is also divided into several important parts in it. Some of them are the initial stage or introduction, group emergence, conflicts that arise, climax, problem solving and the end of the story.

According to the Big Indonesian Dictionary or KBBI, storyline is also a plot that has the meaning of the storyline or storyline in a novel, play and so on.

Definition of Storyline According to Experts

After knowing the meaning of the storyline in general, the next is the meaning of the storyline according to some experts. The reason is that there are several experts who explain the storyline. In order for you to understand even more, here is a complete explanation.

1. Aminuddin

Aminudin explained that the plot is a series of stories formed from the phases of events. That means one story can form a variety of existing events. Plot is also a structure of a series of events in a story which will also be arranged functionally interrelated. So that at the same time it can be a sequence of parts that exist in all semi-fiction.

2. Russia

Rusyana explained that the storyline is not just a series of stories from parts A to Z. However, the storyline is a causal relationship between one event and another in a story.

3. Foster

Foster explained that the storyline is a series of events in short stories and fictional novels that are set in time and based on the law of cause and effect. This is also in accordance with the story framework which represents the structure of the story arrangement.

4. Literary Terms

Literary Terms explain if the storyline is how a story can develop, unfold and move in time.

5. Andri Wicaksono

Andri Wicaksono argues that the storyline is a construction that can be made from a series of events logically and chronologically and are related to one another that are experienced by the actors.

6. M. Inter Spring

Atar Semi explained that the notion of storyline is the structure of a series of events in a story which are basically arranged as functional interrelationships and at the same time can mark the sequence of parts in the whole fiction.

7. Subjiman

Subjiman has an explanation that the storyline is a carefully woven series of events that can move the story through complications towards climax and anti-climax.

Simply put, the storyline is the interweaving of events in a literary work to achieve a certain effect. A story line can be realized from a temporal or time relationship and also a causal or causal relationship.

8. Chatman

Chatman has the opinion that the storyline is a sequence of events in the story.

9. Stanton

Staton has an opinion about the storyline or plot is a story that has a sequence of events. However, each of these events can only be linked in a causal manner to events that caused or caused other events to occur.

10.Kenny

According to Kenny, storyline or plot is an event that will be displayed in a story that is not simple. This is because the author of the story performs events based on causal linkages.

11. Morjorie Bolton

Morjorie Boulton has an opinion if the storyline is the organization in a novel or determines the structure in a novel.

12. Dick Hartoko

Dick Hartono has the opinion that the storyline is a plot created by the story writer in the form of a series of events arranged chronologically, interrelated and causally in accordance with what is experienced by the perpetrators of the story.

Storyline Function

The existence of a storyline in a literary work is certainly not without reason. Because the storyline also has its own function. Basically the function of the storyline is to provide readers with an understanding of an event that can be related to other events.

The storyline can also explain the why and how of an event or conflict in a story. Besides that, the existence of a storyline can also provide a statement or reveal the consequences of an event that occurred.

So that the storyline or plot should be made clear and strong. This is done so that what the writer or author wants to convey can be understood more easily and also clearly by readers.

Types of Storylines

The storyline is also still divided into several types. Each type of storyline has a different meaning. To make it easier for you to understand what types of storylines are, here is a complete explanation.

1. Forward Storyline

The first type of storyline is the forward plot. Where this forward plot can also be referred to as progressive, which means that the action will culminate at the end of the story. Forward plot is also a sequence of events that starts regularly from the beginning to the last part of the story.

For example, in a short story that tells about the journey of a person’s life starting from a child’s childhood then growing into an adult and ending with old age. In addition, the novel will also tell about the conflicts experienced by the characters in the story during their lives.

2. Backward Storyline

Next there is a backwards storyline or commonly referred to as regressive. Backward storylines are actions that will tell about the past of the characters raised in the story.

In the retrograde storyline, the process of telling the conflict will be conveyed at the beginning of the story which will lead to a retrograde past. The series of events in reflux will be told from the past to the present at an inopportune time.

For example, there is a story about a retired police officer who retells the story of his struggles when he was still a police officer.

3. Mixed Storyline

Finally there is the mixed storyline. The mixed storyline can be likened to a river that starts at the highest point which will then continue to tell the past until the very end.

During the process of telling the past, the characters who have been introduced to the story will also introduce other characters in the story that have not ended and Kartika the story will return to the beginning. For example, is a story that will start from the middle of the story and then continue to the beginning or the end.

4. Flashback or Highlight Flow

The flashback or flashback storyline is actually different from the backwards storyline. The flashback or flashback storyline is a plot that basically prioritizes the end of the story which is continued back to the beginning of the story.

The story telling will start from the climax to the beginning of the story and to the end of the story again. The stages in the highlight-back storyline are starting from the climax, then proceed to the anti-climax, ending, complications and returning to the beginning.

5. Climax Plot

The climax plot is a storyline in which the sequence of events takes the form of ascending. The easy sequence in the climax storyline is from ordinary events and then escalates to important events that are more tense than before.

6. Anti-Climax Plot

Then there is the anti-climactic storyline which can be interpreted as a storyline that has a descending sequence of events. Simply put, the sequence in the anti-climax storyline is the opposite of the climax storyline. Which starts from a tense event then decreases to a less stressful event than before and ends with an ordinary event.

7. Chronological Storyline

Then there is also a chronological storyline which is usually interpreted as a storyline in which the events will proceed according to the order in which the events occurred. In this storyline, there will usually be hours, minutes, seconds, days and so on that can indicate a certain time.

Those are several types of storylines in a literary work. Until now, writers of literary works will use the storyline in making their literary works.

Elements in the Storyline

A literary work always has a storyline in it. To be able to help the complete storyline, several supporting elements are needed in it. But do you already know what elements are in a storyline?

No need to be confused if you don’t know what elements are in the storyline. Because the explanation below provides a review of the supporting elements of the storyline.

1. Character Orientation or Introduction

The initial stage in the storyline is starting from the orientation or introduction stage of the characters in the literary work. At this orientation stage, the writer will introduce the characters that will be in the story.

In addition, at this orientation stage, the basic elements in the story will also be shown. Examples are the time of the incident, the setting of the place and how the atmosphere is described in the story.

The purpose of this orientation stage is so that readers can find out which characters play a role in the storyline, where does the story take place and what atmosphere the author is trying to build in the story he is making.

2. The Beginning of the Conflict

When the orientation phase has been carried out, it will proceed to the conflict initial stage section. Where in the early stages of this conflict will later be raised how the conflict occurred and the causes of the conflict.

Usually conflicts will arise because of conflicts between characters or it could also be that a conflict can arise because the main character is having problems. In the early stages of this conflict, it is hoped that it will make the readers curious so they can want to know the continuation of the story.

Readers will usually be increasingly wondering what conflict will occur next by the characters in the story. In the early stages of this conflict it can also encourage readers to be able to continue the story with a more complicated conflict than before.

3. Climax or Peak Conflict

The third stage is the continuation of the conflict recognition stage, namely the climax stage or the peak of conflict in a story. You could say that the peak stage of the conflict is what readers have been waiting for the most.

Apart from that, at the peak stage of this conflict, it can also make readers last a long time reading the existing conflict when the conflict is getting more interesting and more tense than before.

Usually at the peak of the conflict experienced by the main character will be able to cause tension and what problem solving will be done next. The impact can make the readers more curious to continue reading the story.

4. Conflict Declines or Anti-Climax

After the peak stage of conflict has been reached, the next stage is when the conflict subsides or the conflict begins to decline. At this stage, the characters in the story will begin to know how to deal with the ongoing conflict.

The tension witnessed by the readers will subside little by little and usually the readers will also be more in awe of the main character. This is because the characters have been able to solve problems in predictable and unexpected ways. Mostly at this anti-climactic stage, the atmosphere created is unpredictable by the readers.

5. Completion

Finally, there is the stage of solving various kinds of problems faced by the characters so well. If indeed there are no other conflicts, the writer of the story will make a completion stage and the readers will also begin to be able to conclude impressions at this stage. Apart from that, at the completion stage, the writers often insert messages or messages that can be picked up by the readers.

Now that’s a review related to the storyline. The existence of a storyline in a literary work can make the literary work more meaningful and of course it can also attract the attention of readers. Sinaumed’s can read related books at sinaumedia.com . sinaumedia always provides the best products so you have #MoreWithReading information.

Definition of Set – When talking about “set”, what does Sinaumed’s immediately think of? What about calculating sets in mathematics? Or even about the organization of activities in the college major? Even though they look different, both are the same thing, that is, both are in the form of a “group” or “assemblage” that houses objects in a clear definition. Well, this time we will discuss sets in the realm of mathematics …

This set material will generally be taught by teachers since we enter junior high school, in grade 7 to be precise. That is why, set material will be related to Algebra which is equally studied in grade 7 junior high school. So, what is this set? What types of sets are often studied? What about the relations between sets? So, so that Sinaumed’s understands it, let’s look at the following review!

What is the definition of a set in mathematics?

In general, the definition of a set can be interpreted as a collection of objects which have clear definitions and can be differentiated. In short, a set becomes a “collection” of well defined objects .

The term “well-defined” means that for any given object X, we will always be able to determine whether the object belongs to a certain set or not. Then, why is a clear definition needed? This is so that people can determine whether the object or thing in question is a member of the intended set or not.

Well, the objects contained in the set are referred to as “elements”, “elements”, or “members”. Objects that can be included in a set must have certain characteristics in common. The same certain characteristics must also be defined precisely , so that Sinaumed’s can also collect them into a suitable set.

According to Hambali and Siskandar (2002:1), the limit of this set is a collection of objects that are real or not real. For example, a herd of horses, a group of letters, a group of chickens. So, from this example, the words “a flock”, “a group”, or “a group” are the same as a set. Other terms for sets are groups, clusters, families, classes, sets, and others. In order for Sinaumed’s to better understand what a set is, consider the following example …

Examples of Sets and Non-Sets

Example Set:

1. Collection of Four-legged Animals

“Four-legged Animals Group” is a collection. So, if there is a group of animals that are: spiders, ducks, whales, cats, buffaloes, dogs), then Sinaumed’s must already know which animals have 4 legs. Yep, that’s right, there are cats, buffaloes, and dogs.

Meanwhile the rest, namely: spiders, ducks and whales, are not members of the group of Quadrupeds. Moreover, this set of Quadrupeds is very clearly defined.

2. First Set of Four Even Numbers

“First Set of Four Even Numbers” is also a set. The set contains several clearly defined objects, namely the numbers 2, 4, 6, 8, and so on.

Non-set Example:

• Collection of numbers
• Beautiful collection of paintings
• Collection of delicious food

Why can’t the above examples be called sets when it is clear that these examples are collections that have objects? This is because the object is very abstract. That is, the objects in the set are so abstract that one can only think about them, cannot be seen, felt, touched, or touched.

In the first example, the “Collection of Numbers” has objects that are numbers and are very abstract. Yep, the number object is not certain so we also cannot determine what numbers are included in the set. Given that there are many kinds of numbers, right?

Then in the second and third examples, the objects are paintings and food, respectively, which are concrete objects. However, the two objects are also not certain , you know , because beautiful and delicious properties are relative.

So, it can be concluded that

“A set is a collection of objects or objects that can be clearly defined”. 

A Brief History of the Set Concept

Historically, the theory of mathematical sets has become known to the general public since the late 19th century. But at that time, the emergence of the concept of a set was still being debated among mathematicians. Finally, in 1920 AD, the concept of this set became a subject of discussion in the field of mathematics. The person who introduced the concept of this set was Georg Cantor , a German mathematician. For the concept he initiated, he earned the nickname the Father of Association. This is because he was the first figure to develop the existence of set theory to infinite set theory.

The father of this Association was born with the name Georg Ferdinand Ludwig Philipp Cantor on March 3, 1845 in St. Petersburg, Russia. During his primary education, he did not go to school like ordinary children, but used private tutors. Then at the age of 11, he moved to Germany with his family. Right in 1873, at the age of 28, he announced a theory through a letter, even for 10 years.

Although set theory and the concept of infinite numbers rocked the world of mathematics, he still did not gain any benefit from these discoveries. After that, around 1867-1871, he published several articles which contained problems with number theory as a continuation of his set theory. It was only at the end of the 19th century that his theory had a major influence on the mathematical literature.

In his ideas, he stated that this set is ‘a collection of objects that have certain and clear conditions’. Objects can also be objects, numbers, or anything which is then referred to as an element or member of a set. Now, the elements of a set must be clearly defined, because to distinguish which are members of the set, and which are not members of the set.

His most influential writing is the concept of infinite sets, published by Crelle’s Journal in 1874. For this innovation, he was finally recognized as the Father of Sets and later died on January 6, 1918.

Set Notation and How to Express It

Set Notation

Basically, the term “set” has a special sign notation, which is in the form of curly brackets like { }. Usually, this set will also be named using capital letters , for example A, B, C, X, and others. While the use of lowercase letters is used to enrich the members of the set .

Membership of a set is expressed by a symbol in the form of ∈ , which is read as “member of” . Meanwhile, to declare a member that is not included in the set, it will be denoted by the symbol ∉ which reads “not a member of” . Example:

There is a set A which is defined as the set of rainbow colors. The correct answers regarding set A are orange, red, blue, green, yellow, indigo, and purple. So, from this statement, it can be denoted as: Set A = {orange, red, blue, green, yellow, indigo, and purple}

Meanwhile, the membership can be written as:

Orange ∈ A

Red ∈ A

Green ∈ A

Yellow ∈ A

etc

If there is an answer stating that black is included in membership A, then that answer is clearly wrong, right ? So from being declared as black ∉ A, it means that black is not a rainbow color, aka a member of set A.

How to Declare Sets

According to set theory, there are 3 ways that can be used to express sets, namely in the form of tabulations, notation for forming sets, and by mentioning the terms of membership. Well, here is the explanation.

a) Tabulation alias Register ( The Roster Method )

Through this method, later we are required to mention or register the members of the association one by one. In writing, it must be separated by a comma (,) yes… . Please note that in writing the members of this set, it must be clear and nothing should be repeated. Suppose {a, a, b, c, d, d, d}

So, here is an example of writing a set using the tabulation method:

• Set B is a set of vowels. Then it can be written as: B = { a, i, u, e, o }
• Set A is the set of natural numbers less than 9. Then it can be written as: A = { 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 }
• Set K is a set of provincial capitals on the island of Java. Then it can be written as: K = { Jakarta, Serang, Bandung, Semarang, Yogyakarta, Surabaya }
• The set D is the set of negative integers that are more than 10. Then it can be written as: D = { -9, -8, -7, -6, -5, -4, -3, -2, -1 }

b) With Set Forming Notation ( The Rule Method )

Through this method, later the members of the set will be declared with variables (substitutes or modifiers), which are then followed by dashes, and continued by mentioning the properties or characteristics of the elements of the set. For example,

• C = { x | x wind instrument }

Read: set C is the set x such that x is a wind instrument.

• P = {x| x is a prime number less than 12}

Read: P is a set with x such that x is a prime number less than 12.

• L = {x| x names of districts/cities in Central Java Province}

Read: L is a set with x such that x is the names of districts/cities in the province of Central Java.

• D = {x │ x are the first five letters of the Latin alphabet}

Read: the set D is the set x such that x is the first letter of the Latin alphabet.

c) By stating the terms of membership

Through this method, later the members of the set will be expressed by means of a description. That is, to express the set is in words and delimited by curly brackets { } . Example:

• The T set is the traffic color sets.
• Association B is an association of Indonesian Language and Literature Education UNNES students who take a specialization in Script Editing.
• The set Y is the first 7 letters in the order of the Latin alphabet.

Set Types

The existence of a set is not solely one, yes, but there are 4 types that have their own characteristics. Well, here is the explanation.

1. Empty Set

As the name implies, this one set does not have or does not even have any members. The Empty Set will be denoted by a symbol in the form of Φ or { } . In practice, many people cannot distinguish between an empty set and an imprecise set (not a set).

In the empty set, this occurs when the members really do not exist, so that the set or sets are included in the empty set. However, if the members are not clear, in the sense that it cannot be distinguished whether the object in question includes members or not, then the set is not a set, right ? Example of an empty set:

• Set S is a group of students majoring in English Literature who are 6 years old.
• The W set is the set of days that start with the letter “H”.
• The set G is the set of odd numbers that are divisible by 2.

To understand the existence of this empty set, you have to be careful with the number zero (0), right… This is because the number zero (0) is not the empty set, but rather a member of the set which is indeed worth zero (0). For example, there is a set of 5 first whole numbers, so of course the number 0 is a member of that set.

2. The Set of the Universe (Universum)

That is a set that can contain all the objects being discussed. This universal set is also called the universal set of talks, aka the universe set, so it will be denoted as S or U. For example:

• A collection of Sudirman Kindergarten children wearing white masks

Then the universal set is the set of all Sudirman Kindergarten children.

• The set of days that start with the letter S.

Then the universal set is the set of the names of the days during the week.

• B = {red, yellow, green}

Then, the set of possible universes is S = {traffic light colors} or S = {rainbow colors}

3. Finite set

That is a set that has a finite number of members alias can be counted. This type of set is often called a finite set. Example:

• A = {x│x natural number <7}.

If written in tabular form then A = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6}. The number of finite members of the set A (can be counted), namely 6 (six).

4. Infinite Set

That is the type of set that has infinite members alias cannot be counted, so it is impossible to write in detail, especially when using the tabulation method. So what can be done is to use the sign “…” (three dots) which reads “ next ”. This set is also known as the infinite set. Example:

B = {x│x natural number >15}

Then B can be written as B = {16, 17, 18,…}

Read set B is the set of numbers 16, 17, 18 and so on.

So, that’s an overview of what a set is, along with its history, notation, ways of expressing it, and its types. Has Sinaumed’s been able to make an example of this set based on the objects around you?

Source:

Nugraha, Ali and A.Sy. Dina Dwiyana. MODULE 1: Sets ( http://repository.ut.ac.id/ )

Mahmud, Amir, et al. (2020). COLLECTIONS: Theory and Example Problems . Malang: Expertmedia Press ( http://repository.radenintan.ac.id/ )

Darwanto, et al. (2020). Set Theory . Lampung: Muhammadiyah University Kotabumi. ( http://repository.umko.ac.id/ )

https://evan_ramdan.staff.gunadarma.ac.id/

Also Read!

• 3 Scale Formulas in Basic Mathematics
• Biography of the Inventor of Mathematics
• Nature, Types, and How to Work Intervals in Mathematics
• The formula for the surface area of ​​a pyramid and examples of problems
• Understanding Rotation Symmetry and Rotation Symmetry
• Cone Volume Formula and How to Calculate It
• History, Definition, Functions, and Examples of Algorithms
• Number Theory and Its Types
• The formula for the area of ​​a square along with examples of questions and discussion
• Definition of Determinants and How to Find It

Renewable Energy – Today’s global energy demand has tripled since 1950 and its use is estimated to have reached 10,000 million tons per year. Most of this energy is produced from non-renewable materials, such as coal, gas, oil and nuclear energy.

Petroleum is the most critical energy source among these energy sources. Given the dwindling availability of petroleum and the dangers of its use, efforts to find renewable and environmentally friendly energy sources are important.

As reported by the Center for Energy Studies, Gadjah Mada University (UGM), renewable energy is energy that comes from natural sources, such as sunlight, wind, rain, geothermal, and biomass. Several potential and abundant sources of renewable energy in Indonesia are wind, geothermal, hydropower, solar, biomass (biogas, solid biofuel, and liquid biofuel).

Definition of Renewable Energy

Renewable energy is energy that comes from “sustainable natural processes”, such as solar power, wind power, water currents, biological processes, and geothermal. To find out more about the use of renewable energy in modern society, see development of renewable energy. For general discussion, see future energy development.

Renewable energy.

The concept of renewable energy became known in the 1970s, as an effort to balance the development of nuclear and fossil fueled energy. The most common definition is a source of energy that can be quickly restored naturally and the process is sustainable. By this definition, nuclear and fossil fuels are excluded.

By definition, all renewable energy is also sustainable energy, because it is always available in nature for a relatively very long time, so there is no need to worry or anticipate that its sources will run out. Non-nuclear energy proponents do not include nuclear power as part of sustainable energy because the supply of uranium-235 in nature has a limit, say hundreds of years.

However, nuclear activists argue that nuclear is considered sustainable energy if it is used as fuel in fast breeder reactors (FBR: Fast Breeder Reactor ) because nuclear fuel reserves can “multiply” hundreds to thousands of times.

The reason is this, the nuclear reserves that energy experts talk about in the order of tens or hundreds of years are implicitly calculated with the assumption that the reactor used is an ordinary reactor (generally the BWR or PWR type), which incidentally can only burn U-235. On the one hand, the content of U-235 in nature is no more than 0.72%, the remaining approximately 99.28% is U-238.

Uranium type U-238 in “normal” burning conditions (used as fuel in normal reactors) cannot produce nuclear energy, but if it is mixed with U-235 and fed together into a breeder reactor, it is equivalent to the consumption/burning of U -235, U-238 undergoes a 1 neutron capture reaction and transforms into U-239.

In a matter of minutes U-239 decays while releasing beta particles and transforms back into Np-239. Np-239 also decays again while emitting beta particles to become Pu-239. This Pu-239, which although not available in nature, is formed as a by-product of burning U-235, has the ability to divide and produce energy like U-235.

You can imagine if all U-238, which is thousands of times more numerous than U-235, was successfully converted into Pu-239, how much increase would occur in the amount of nuclear fuel. The same thing happened to the atom [thorium-233] which, by capturing 1 neutron, changed its form to U-233 which has the ability to chain reaction (nuclear reaction).

That is why certain developed countries are reluctant to give up nuclear, even though the radioactive risks it receives are not light. Fast breeder reactors like those owned by North Korea are under strict supervision from the IAEA because they are capable of producing new Pu-239 fuel which is vulnerable to being misused for weapons of mass destruction. Nuclear opponents, on the other hand, tend to use the term “sustainable energy” as a synonym for “renewable energy” to exclude nuclear energy from the discussion of the energy group.

 

Main Source of Renewable Energy

1. Geothermal Energy

Geothermal energy comes from radioactive decay in the center of the earth, which heats the earth from within, as well as from the sun’s heat, which heats the earth’s surface. There are three ways to use geothermal energy, namely:

• As a power generator and used in the form of electricity.
• As a source of heat that is used directly using pipes into the bowels of the earth.
• As a heat pump pumped directly from the bowels of the earth

Geothermal is a form of heat energy or thermal energy that is generated and stored in the earth. Heat energy is energy that determines the temperature of an object. Geothermal energy comes from energy from the formation of planets (20%) and radioactive decay of minerals (80%). The geothermal gradient, defined by the temperature difference between the Earth’s core and its surface, drives the continuous conduction in the form of heat energy from the core to the Earth’s surface.

The temperature of the earth’s core reaches more than 5000 ⁰ C. Heat flows by conduction towards the rocks around the earth’s core. This heat causes the rocks to melt, forming magma. Magma transfers heat by convection and moves up because magma in the form of molten rock has a lower density than solid rock. Magma heats the earth’s crust and water flowing in the earth’s crust, heating it up to 300 ⁰ C. This hot water creates high pressure so that water comes out of the earth’s crust.

Geothermal energy from the Earth’s core is closer to the surface in some areas. Hot steam or underground water can be harnessed, brought to the surface, and can be used to generate electricity. Geothermal power sources are located in several geologically unstable parts such as Iceland, New Zealand, United States of America, Philippines and Italy.

The two most prominent areas so far in the United States are in the Yellowstone dome and in northern California. Iceland generates geothermal power and delivered energy to 66% of all Icelandic homes in 2000, in the form of direct heat energy and electrical energy through power plants. 86% of houses in Iceland use geothermal energy to heat their homes.

2. Solar Energy

Solar panels ( photovoltaic arrays ) aboard small yachts at sea can charge 12 V batteries to 9 amperes in full and direct sunlight conditions.

Since most renewable energy comes from “solar energy” the term is a little confusing. However, what is meant here is energy that is collected directly from sunlight.

Solar power can be used for:

• Generate electricity using solar cells.
• Generating electricity Using solar towers.
• Heats the building directly.
• Heating the building through a heat pump.
• Heating food using a solar oven.
• Heats water via a solar powered water heater.

Of course the sun does not provide constant energy to every point on earth, so its use is limited. Solar cells are often used to charge batteries during the day and the power from the batteries is used at night when sunlight is not available.

 

3. Wind Power

The temperature difference in two different places produces different air pressure, thus producing wind. Wind is the movement of matter (air) and has been known for a long time to drive turbines. Wind turbines are used to generate kinetic energy and electrical energy.

The energy available from the wind is a function of wind speed; when the wind speed increases, the output energy also increases up to the maximum limit of energy that the turbine can produce. Areas with stronger and more constant winds, such as offshore and upland, are usually preferred for developing “wind farms”.

4. Water Energy

Water energy is used because it has mass and is able to flow. Water has a density of 800 times that of air. Even the slow movement of water can be converted into other forms of energy. Water turbines are designed to obtain energy from various types of reservoirs, which are calculated from the amount of water mass, height, to water velocity.

Water energy is utilized in the form of:

• Power generation dams, the largest of which is the Three Gorges dam in China.
• Micro hydro built to generate electricity up to a scale of 100 kilowatts. Generally used in remote areas that have many water sources.
• A run-of-the-river built by harnessing the kinetic energy of flowing water without the need for a large water reservoir.

5. Biomass

Plants usually use photosynthesis to store solar energy, air, and CO ₂ . Biofuels ( biofuels ) are fuels obtained from biomass-organisms or products of animal metabolism, such as cow dung and so on. It is also a renewable energy source. Usually biomass is burned to release the chemical energy stored in it, except when biofuel is used for fuel cell fuel (eg direct methanol fuel cell and direct ethanol fuel cell ).

Biomass can be used directly as fuel or to produce other types of fuels such as biodiesel, bioethanol or biogas depending on the source. Biomass in the form of biodiesel, bioethanol and biogas can be burned directly in an internal combustion engine or boiler under certain conditions.

Biomass becomes a renewable energy source if the extraction rate does not exceed the production rate, because basically biomass is a material produced by nature in a relatively short time through various biological processes. Various cases of non-renewable biomass use have occurred, such as the case of Roman era deforestation, and what is happening now, deforestation of the Amazon forest. Peat is also actually a biomass whose definition as renewable energy is quite biased because the rate of extraction by humans is not proportional to the rate of growth of the peat layer.

There are three forms of using biomass, namely solid, liquid, and gas. In general, there are two methods of producing biomass, namely by growing biomass-producing organisms and using the leftover materials from living things processing industries.

a. Liquid Bio-Fuel

Liquid bio-fuels are usually in the form of bio-alcohols such as methanol, ethanol and biodiesel. Biodiesel can be used in modern diesel vehicles with little or no modification and can be obtained from waste vegetable and animal oils and fats. Depending on the potential of each region, corn, sugar beet, sugarcane and several types of grass are cultivated to produce bioethanol. Meanwhile, biodiesel is produced from plants or plant products that contain oil (oil palm, copra, castor seeds, algae) and has gone through various processes such as esterification.

b. Solid Biomass

Direct use is usually in the form of flammable solids, either kindling or flammable plants. Plants can be cultivated specifically for burning or can be used for other purposes, such as processing in certain industries and processing waste that can be burned as fuel.

Biomass briquettes manufacture also uses solid biomass, where the raw material can be in the form of chunks or flakes of raw solid biomass or which have gone through certain processes such as pyrolysis to increase the percentage of carbon and reduce the water content. Solid biomass can also be processed by gasification to produce gas.

c. Biogas

Various organic materials, biologically by fermentation, as well as physico-chemically by gasification, can release flammable gases. Biogas can easily be produced from various industrial wastes that exist today, such as paper production, sugar production, livestock manure, and so on. Various waste streams must be diluted with water and allowed to naturally ferment, producing methane gas. The residue from this fermentation activity is fertilizer which is rich in nitrogen, carbon and minerals.

Small Scale Energy Sources

• Piezoelectricity, is an electric charge resulting from the application of mechanical stress to a solid object. This object converts mechanical energy into electrical energy.
• An automatic watch ( Automatic watch, self-winding watch ) is a watch that is driven by stored mechanical energy, which is obtained from the movement of the user’s hand. Mechanical energy is stored in the spring mechanism inside.
• Electrokinetic runway ( electrokinetic road ramp ) is a method of generating electrical energy by utilizing the kinetic energy of cars moving on a runway installed on the road. A runway has been installed in the parking lot of a Sainsbury’s supermarket in Gloucester, United Kingdom, where the electricity generated is used to power a cash register.
• Captures unutilized electromagnetic radiation and converts it into electrical energy using a rectifying antenna . This is one method of harvesting energy ( energy harvesting ).

Problems in Renewable Energy

1. Aesthetics, Habitat Endangerment, and Land Use

Some people dislike the aesthetics of wind turbines or bring up nature conservation issues when large solar panels are installed in villages. Those trying to take advantage of this renewable technology should do so in a preferred way, for example utilizing solar collectors as noise barriers along the way, integrating them as sun shades, installing them on existing roofs and even replacing the roof completely, also amorphous photovoltaic cells can be used to replace window.

Several renewable energy extraction systems create unique environmental problems. For example, wind turbines can be dangerous to flying birds, while hydropower dams can create barriers to fish migration—a serious problem in the Pacific Northwest which has reduced salmon populations.

Burning biomass and biofuels causes the same air pollution as burning fossil fuels, although this carbon released into the atmosphere can be reabsorbed if the biomass producing organisms are continuously cultivated. Another problem with many renewable energies, particularly biomass and biofuels, is the large amount of land required to cultivate them.

2. Concentration

Another problem is the variability and distribution of renewable energy in nature, except for geothermal energy which is generally concentrated in one particular area but is found in extreme locations. Wind energy is the most difficult to focus, so it requires a large turbine to capture as much wind energy as possible.

The method of utilizing water energy depends on the location and characteristics of the water source so that the design of the water turbine can be different. Utilization of solar energy can be done in various ways, but to get a lot of energy requires a large area of ​​capture.

For comparison, under standard testing conditions in the United States of America, the energy received by 1 m2 ^of solar cells having an efficiency of 20% will produce 200 watts. The standard test conditions in question are an air temperature of 20 ⁰ C and an irradiance of 1000 W/m ² .

3. Distance to Electrical Energy Receivers

Geographical diversity is also a significant issue, as some renewable energy sources such as geothermal, hydro, and wind can be located far from receiving electricity; geothermal in the mountains, water energy in the upper reaches of the river, and wind energy off the coast or in the highlands. The utilization of these resources on a large scale will likely require substantial investment in transmission and distribution networks and the technology itself in dealing with the associated environment.

4. Availability

One significant drawback is the availability of renewable energy in nature; some of them exist only occasionally and not all the time (intermittent). For example, sunlight which is only available during the day, wind energy whose strength varies at any time, water energy which cannot be utilized when rivers are dry, biomass has the same problems as those faced by agriculture (eg climate, pests), and so on. Meanwhile, geothermal energy can be available all the time.

Understanding Personnel Administration –  Every company, of course, has an administration section. One of them is the personnel administration section. Usually, this administration section will take care of matters that are closely related to the administrative matters of the company. Then, what about personnel administration?

When you hear the term personnel administration, perhaps the first thing that comes to mind is the system implemented in a company. However, in reality, material regarding personnel administration is also a very important thing to learn, not only for those of us who want to pursue a career in a company, but also for everyone who wants to set up a business or enterprise.

What is the Definition of Personnel Administration?

As the name suggests, the term personnel administration is a combination of two words, namely administration and staffing. The Liang Gie in his book entitled Office Administration states that administration is the entire process of organizing any collaborative effort on a group of people in order to achieve predetermined goals.

Meanwhile, in the Personnel Administration book , Saksono defines staffing as all people who are employed in a particular agency, whether in a government agency or a private agency.

Based on the combination of these two definitions, it can be concluded that personnel administration is all activities or activities related to the problem of using employees to achieve a certain goal.

Other sources state that personnel administration is the whole activity or activities that are also related to the problem of ‘using’ employees as workforce so that they can achieve goals properly.

Personnel administration is all forms of activities related to the management or use of employees to achieve certain goals . If personnel administration exists in a company, then it is certain to achieve the goals of the company that have been determined.

While the administrator has the goal of being able to organize and control all activities so that they are able to maintain, develop, acquire, or use employees according to their workload. This is in order to achieve the goals of the organization or company that have been predetermined properly.

We need to know together, the workload of an employee or employee must be appropriate for each status. The workload that is not small must be divided evenly for employees. This is one of the roles of personnel administration. That way, there are no employees who are overloaded with work, nor are there employees who have a small workload and are unemployed a lot.

 

How is the Personnel Administration Formulated?

Please note, personnel administration can be formulated as follows, namely:

1. As Science

As a science, personnel administration studies all processes of using human power from acceptance to dismissal.

2. As Process

As a process, personnel administration is the process of administering staffing politics. With “staffing political policies” or work programs, goals related to human labor are used in cooperative efforts to achieve certain goals.

3. As a Function

As a function, personnel administration regulates and manages the use of human labor in a cooperative effort between groups of people in order to achieve certain goals which include several activities. First, formulate the main goals and objectives of political policy. Second, setting up an organization in order to carry out the implementation of the main goals and objectives or political policies.

4. As Art

As an art, personnel administration selects new employees and uses old employees in such a way that maximum results and services can be obtained from all human labor, both in terms of quantity/quantity as well as quality/quality.

What is the Function of Personnel Administration?

What does Sinaumed’s know about the function of this personnel administration? Actually, the personnel administration function is divided into two, namely managerial functions and operative or technical functions. The following are some of the things that are included in managerial functions and operational or technical functions.

1. Managerial Functions

Managerial functions have the meaning of functions that are closely related to jobs that prioritize management or not with technical matters. This includes planning, organizing, directing, and controlling employees.

Planning includes determining the needs of employees, anticipating changes that occur related to employee needs, and so on. This includes planning to fill seats from positions that will be vacant later.

Organizing includes the division of tasks and authority which is also usually shown through the hierarchy of the organizational or company structure. This employee briefing is more towards improving performance for employees such as giving rewards and other forms of appreciation. To control these employees, measuring and evaluating employee performance is carried out in the form of supervision or monitoring.

2. Operational or Technical Functions

This operative function or technical function is related to activities carried out physically and more technically including procurement, development, compensation, integration to employee retirement.

Procurement of employees includes the process of employee recruitment and selection. Employee development can include developing the abilities or skills of employees through training , seminars, and so on.

Creating integration between employees so they can work effectively and cooperatively also creates employee loyalty to the company. In addition, through this personnel administration operative function various forms of remuneration will be taken care of in the form of compensation to employee or pensioner old age benefits.

3. Employee Planning

Employee planning can be interpreted as a process of determining future employee needs based on changes that occur and the supply of labor in the company.

Employee planning is an important part and a contributor to the strategic planning process, because it helps organizations determine the resources needed, and helps determine what can really be achieved with the resources that are already available.

Good employee planning will improve several things such as employee utilization, adjust employee activities and future needs efficiently, increase efficiency in recruiting new employees and complete information about staffing that can help staffing activities and other organizational units of the company.

Through this planning, deficiencies can be identified compared to needs so that new employee recruitment, promotions, and transfers can be carried out proactively so as not to disrupt the company’s organizational activities.

In making an employee plan it is necessary to pay attention to the internal and external factors of the company organization. On the other hand, it is also necessary to pay attention to the steps that must be taken as stated by the figures Miller Burack and Maryann.

4. Staffing Organization

Organizing is a step in the framework of establishing, classifying, and managing various kinds of activities that are deemed necessary, determining one’s duties and authority, delegating authority to achieve a goal.

Organizing delivers all basic resources (human and non-human) into a certain pattern in such a way that the people working in it can work together empowered to achieve the goals set by the company.

One of the results of organizing is the formation of an organizational structure and in the organizational structure it will be seen how the relationship between one unit and another unit.

In other words, the organizational structure will greatly affect the flow of work, delegation of authority and responsibility, control and control systems, as well as the flow of orders and accountability. Therefore, in designing an organizational structure for the personnel department, it is necessary to consider various factors as described above.

5. Employee Briefing

There are several theories and beliefs about what motivates employees. Overall, there is no agreement on this motivation. Therefore, it is very difficult for corporate organizations to arrive at policies and approaches that will satisfy all company employees to work properly and effectively.

In addition, for organizations of any size, it is impractical to make an in-depth analysis of what motivates each employee. However, there are rules of thumb that can be followed at least to help motivate employees and increase employee job satisfaction, including the following.

1. Explain to employees what effective performance means and also make sure they know what is expected of them for the company.
2. Ensuring that there is a clear relationship between performance and rewards and that any such relationship is communicated to employees and the company’s top management.
3. Ensuring that all employees are treated fairly, and performance appraisal is objective.
4. If possible, develop different types of awards, not everyone can be promoted (promoted) or some need to be promoted
5. Encourage the best possible enthusiasm in the work environment and also develop a management style that is easily absorbed and can be changed to suit people and the surrounding environment
6. Develop a performance management system or at least set targets that can be achieved in order to continue to develop properly
7. Also take into account all existing environmental and social factors, such as the comfort and facilities of the work environment, social interaction among employees, the point is all factors that can be a source of employee dissatisfaction.

6. Employee Control

Supervision as part of control is the process of measuring and assessing the level of effectiveness of employee work and the level of efficiency in the use of work facilities in contributing to the achievement of company goals.

For each supervisory activity, benchmarks or criteria are needed to measure the level of success at work, which in this performance appraisal is referred to as a work standard.

The standard is a standard criterion or model that will be compared with the real results. There are many types of standards that can be used in controlling staffing activities. In controlling personnel units or divisions, leaders must be able to find strategic control items that can be monitored based on irregularities.

 

What is the Purpose of Personnel Administration?

As explained above, one of the roles of personnel administration is to ensure that the workload of employees is in accordance with the roles and needs of the company. Then, what is the real purpose of this personnel administration?

The main objective of personnel administration is to balance the number of employees with the company’s needs and to adjust the existing workload to the number of available employees. This is done in order to ensure the portion or capacity of each employee’s work in accordance with the capabilities and workload of each.

The ultimate goal is with personnel administration and adjustments to the number of employees and workload, it will result in increased employee productivity, appropriate and timely work so that the company’s goals or targets can be achieved.

Organizational efficiency, effectiveness and productivity in order to achieve the highest level is the main goal of administration. In order to achieve these administrative goals, it takes the role of human resources and the role of non-human resources.

The objectives of personnel administration are as follows:

1. In order to strengthen the system of planning and employee development and fulfillment or recruitment in accordance with the level of needs that have been available.
2. To develop a personnel information management system.
3. To improve the quality of personnel resources in order to increase competency in accordance with the main tasks and functions carried out through education and training, increase in formal education, and improve technical and functional skills of government or company officials
4. In order to realize employee management in accordance with position competencies and job requirements and pay attention to the company’s career patterns
5. To improve employee development in order to increase the accountability and welfare of employees.
6. In the scope of government, to improve the performance of personnel services in order to increase the capacity of local governments to realize good governance or commonly referred to as Good Governance .

 

What is the Scope of the Personnel Administration System?

We can actually see the scope of the administrative system from the personnel administration function itself. Activities that are included in the personnel administration system of course include the management of human resources of a company.

The scope of this personnel administration system includes:

1. Employee Procurement

Covers all forms or employee recruitment processes needed by the company. Recruitment is of course carried out by considering the needs of the company and the suitability of positions and duties in the company.

2. Employee Planning and Organizing

Planning and organizing includes the elaboration or description of the scope of responsibilities as well as the rights and obligations of the employees themselves. This plan is also included in it to determine the needs of employees and changes that may occur.

3. Employee Development

Employee development will include activities related to improving employee skills . It could also be basic training, training, seminars, workshops and others.

4. Direction and Control

Direction and control includes monitoring employee performance as well as directing them to stay on track . The goal is to achieve the goals or targets that have been set.

5. Employee Welfare Guarantee

The scope of the personnel administration system also includes the welfare of employees. Creating a good work environment, providing compensation up to old age security.

 

Book Recommendations About Personnel Administration

Here are some recommendations for reading books that Sinaumed’s can read, including:

1. Understanding Administration, Organization, and Management (2020) by Arif Yusuf Hamali, et al

This book, written by Arif Yusuf Hamali, et al, is a complement to teaching and learning activities for students in tertiary institutions who take Administration, Organization and Management courses or commonly known as Introduction to Management.

This book provides readers with an understanding of the science surrounding administrative, organizational and management issues, so that it is hoped that readers will be able to gain knowledge to apply to their respective fields of work or organizations where students are active.

This book will be useful for all people who are active in administrative and management work of an organization or company.

 

2. Educational Administration, Management, and Leadership: theory and practice (2019) by Husaini Usman

A book worth reading by academics, practitioners, and the general public who still don’t know the difference between management and administration, management and leadership, managers and administrators, and the definition of educational management.

 

3. Civil Service Law in Indonesia (2017) by Sri Hartini and Tedy Sudrajat

A book that comprehensively examines Civil Service Law in Indonesia with reference to the latest laws and regulations. This book has the advantage of using language that is straightforward and easy to understand and can construct personnel law objects starting from the Civil Service Format in Indonesia.

Thus the article about the notion of personnel administration. Hope it’s useful! Please visit sinaumedia.com to find other books according to Sinaumed’s’ needs . Because, as #FriendsWithoutBorders, sinaumedia will always provide the best and most complete information.

Operational Strategy – With increasingly fierce competition in every industry, a company must have a strategy to carry out its operations. A strategy to compete is developed based on various considerations, including a company’s relationship with the environment around it. This term is called operations strategy.

The use of this strategy has long been developed and implemented by global companies, one of which is in Japan. They can utilize and maximize their manufacturing operations or factory operations to compete internationally. In this way, they can design and manufacture a wide range of quality products at a more affordable price.

For most businesses, success is not a coincidence, but a series of right decisions made at the right time. Careful planning, preparation and execution are essential to the success of most companies, and it all starts with determining the right operating strategy.

But what is an operations strategy and how do you implement the right strategy for your company? Do Sinaumed’s friends know? In this article, we will discuss it in more depth to make your business more productive.

Definition of Operations Strategy

Operations strategy ( operational strategy ) is the vision of the operations function that sets the overall direction for decision making. This vision must be incorporated into a business strategy and is often reflected in a formal plan. The operations strategy must create consistent decision patterns in operations and provide a competitive advantage for the company.

Many other definitions are given to complement the above definition, some of which are:

Schroeder, Anderson and Cleveland (1986) define an operations strategy consisting of four components, namely: mission , objectives , distinctive competence and policies . These four factors explain what operational objectives must be achieved and how to achieve these objectives. The resulting strategy will help guide decision making across all parts of its operations.

1. Missions

Each activity must have a mission that is aligned with the business strategy and aligned with other functional strategies. The operating mission is part of the main business strategy selected for the business unit. For example, your company’s business strategy is to become a product manager. Thus, the operational mission that can be carried out is to highlight the introduction of new products and product flexibility to adapt to the evolution of market demand.

2. Distinctive Competence

The existence of distinctive competence allows operations to outperform competitors. This is made possible by the existence of unique resources that are not owned by competitors and are difficult to imitate. These distinctive skills must also align with the company’s operating mission. This component is not only important in determining the main business strategy but is also the key to the success of your business.

3. Operational Objectives

Operations has four main goals, namely cost, flexibility, quality, and delivery. All of these goals must be set according to their main mission and can be measured quantitatively and qualitatively.

4. Policy

Policy or operation policy explains how the objectives of the operation will be achieved.  operation policy must be made by developing every key decision, namely process, quality system, capability, and inventory.

In addition, Hayes and Wheelwright (1984) define operations strategy as a consistent pattern of operating decisions. The more consistent these decisions and the higher the level of support for the business strategy and the better the results.

Wickham Skinner (1985 ) defines operations strategy in relation to the relationship between operating decisions and corporate strategy (corporate strategy) . He believed that when operations were not aligned with corporate strategy, executive decisions were often inconsistent and short-term. As a result, these activities are segregated from the business and their link to corporate strategy is weak.

The operations strategy has three main inputs, namely business strategy, internal analysis and internal analysis. This strategy must be able to assist companies in adjusting to existing external factors such as changing consumer needs, technological developments, availability of raw materials, conditions of competitors to situations related to social and legal conditions.

Operations Strategy Function for a Business

Now that you know what an operations strategy is, you can have some idea of ​​what it does. This strategy basically helps in gaining the competitive advantage of the company over its competitors. What can a company achieve with the right operating strategy?

1. Enabling Companies to Compete in Differentiation

To be able to attract the attention of customers, a company must be different. In other words, the product you produce must be different from your competitors or other company’s goods. Even though it’s different, it doesn’t mean your product is weird. The existence of this point of difference allows products to be more attractive and valuable while still being able to meet consumer needs.

The differentiation strategy that can be realized in operations can be a way for companies to gain competitive advantage. One way is to pursue a customer-focused operations strategy. You can start by analyzing the market to find out the needs of your customers and the strengths of your competitors.

The results of the analysis are then built into the company’s strategy which is then used as a framework for overall objectives. Through the strategic planning process, each functional area will be responsible for identifying and developing ways to achieve company goals.

2. Allows Companies to Compete at the Lowest Cost

A strategy that works well can benefit the company in the form of low production costs. This achievement requires a series of efforts, one of which is focusing on customer needs in product design and operating activities by eliminating rework (removal may require rework), scrap, inspection and other items that cannot add value to the final product.

Fixed cost reduction strategy must be carried out by considering the maximum value expected by consumers. Not only during production, but also during delivery. The faster the product reaches the consumer after production, the better the quality. In addition, you can also reduce operating time and simplify operating processes.

3. Enabling Companies to Compete on Response

The response in question is a set of values ​​associated with fast performance, flexibility, and skill. Quick response covers various plans, including in the product design process, from production to distribution.

Meanwhile, response refers to the company’s ability to respond to possible market changes, starting from fluctuations in production volume to changes or updates to market product designs.

The corporate environment can change quickly, including the needs and expectations of consumers for the products you manufacture. The company’s ability to adapt to all these changes through a skilled operating strategy will set it apart from other companies. This ability is called flexibility.

There are two types of flexibility known in business, namely product flexibility and volume flexibility. Product flexibility refers to a company’s ability to offer a wide variety of products, both goods and services, to meet unique customer needs.

The existence of a flexible system in this strategy allows companies to quickly add new products or remove products that are not valued. The goal, of course, is to achieve maximum profit and satisfy customers.

Another aspect that is no less important is the ability to adjust the quantity or volume of production according to existing demand. When demand increases, the quantity produced must also increase.

This flexibility in production volume is one step towards a sustainable business. The three functions above can be achieved if the company has a well-functioning operating strategy. When all the components of a company’s strategy are linked together, the expected benefits and desired goals can be achieved.

Operations Strategy Planning

The business operations strategy itself takes many different forms in practice. Each type of operations strategy has its own role and function. This is a form of operating strategy that you should know about.

1. Production Planning

As the name suggests, the production planning operations strategy deals with the production process. In particular, production planning is concerned with planning the methods and technology needed by the workforce to complete the production process.

2. Financial Planning

Financial planning deals with planning related to the funds needed to carry out daily business or business operations.

3. Facility Planning

Facilities are an important part of the company’s daily operations. Proper facility planning will ensure that the workforce has the facilities they need to ensure the smooth production of a product or service.

4. Marketing Planning

Marketing planning involves the process of distributing and/or selling goods, both products and services that you produce.

5. Human Resource Planning

Human resource planning deals with issues related to resource management which begins with search or recruitment, from selection to placement of workers in predetermined positions.

Developing an Operations Strategy to Develop the Business

The formulation of an operational strategy must be carried out in accordance with the conditions of the company, so that the goals set can be achieved more easily. So, here’s how to develop an operational strategy as the basis for preparing a work plan.

1. Operations Strategy as the basis for preparing work plans

You can follow two steps to develop a strategy that becomes the basic reference in preparing a work plan, namely adopting a cost-effective development approach, SWOT, systems approach, and gap planning method.

• Profitable Development Approach

That is an effort to compile a work program that is able to bring in large profits and profits. Profitable development can strike a very favorable balance between the company environment and available advice.

• SWOT method

WOT or Strengths, Weaknesses, Opportunities and Threats aka Strengths, Weaknesses, Opportunities and Threats.

The SWOT method is a form of corporate approach that must balance strengths and weaknesses, see the opportunities that lie ahead and businesses must also understand the threats, disruptions, challenges and obstacles that may be faced in the future.

• Systems Approach

This approach includes a system-focused approach which is then developed to form a strategic plan.

• The Planning Gap Approach

The planning gap approach will start with traditional planning thinking and then be developed further with more advanced, dynamic, and effective thinking.

2. Goals

The target is the final result achieved from business activities. Targets also describe what must be achieved through the operational strategy implemented to achieve business goals (in the form of measurable goals).

In reality, goals are tangible results achieved in a specific, more measurable formula within a year. Here, the formulation of the operating strategy must be aligned with the specifications of the company’s products, markets and marketing, technology, and resources.

3. Strategic Achievements 

Company performance indicators are both quantitative and qualitative and describe how well the goals or objectives set have been achieved. Performance metrics should be something that can be calculated, measured, and used as a basis for evaluating or demonstrating how well performance is at the planning, implementation, and post-operation monitoring stages.

Performance indicators can also be a source of certainty if the company’s daily performance shows progress in achieving the goals and objectives that have been set. Without job metrics, it will be difficult for companies to measure the performance (cleanliness or tidiness) of work departments. The steps above need to be carried out sequentially and continuously together so that the goals are more easily achieved.

In the process of operational strategic management, companies must also compare the results obtained with the level of achievement of objectives. This process also includes an evaluation stage and includes four key elements, namely:

• Setting work goals, target tolerance limits, standards, strategies and operational plans.
• Measure the position directly related to the target for a certain period of time. If results fall outside these limits, corrective action is required.
• Analyze deviations from the specified tolerance limits.
• Make changes if needed.

5 Core Operations Strategies that Must Have in Business

1. Corporate Strategy and Cross-Functional Interactions

The company’s strategy makes the business a piecemeal, interconnected system. Just as the heart muscle depends on brain function in the human body, every part of a business depends on others to stay healthy and achieve the desired results. The strategy planned and used by the business must support the company’s strategy and the use of cross-functional interactions.

2. Customer Driven Strategy

The operating strategy must include a customer-focused approach to meeting the needs and wants of target markets.

To do so, companies must develop strategies to assess and adapt to changing environments, continuously improve core competencies, and develop new strengths in a sustainable manner. For example, when evaluating marketing processes, companies must monitor market trends to take advantage of new opportunities and avoid possible threats.

3. Develop Core Competencies

Core competencies are strengths and resources within a company. While core competencies may vary by industry and company, they can include well-trained staff, optimal business locations, and marketing and financial expertise.

By identifying core competencies, companies can develop processes such as customer satisfaction, product development, and build professional relationships with stakeholders.

4. Competitive Priority Development

Developing competitive priorities comes from establishing business strategy, analyzing markets, identifying core processes, and conducting needs analysis. To create competitive priorities, organizations evaluate operating costs, product or service quality, time needed to develop and deliver goods or services, and product or service flexibility based on type, volume, and customization.

Competitive priorities must include the ability to provide a quality product or service at a reasonable cost that consistently meets customer needs.

5. Product and Service Development

Product and service development strategies must consider design, innovation and added value. When developing a product for a new customer, several options can be presented, namely:

• Companies may decide to take the lead in introducing a new product or service.
• Wait for the introduction of the innovation in the market to develop it or, Wait to see if the company’s innovation is successful before proceeding.
• When developing services, companies should consider combining them with support services and immediately observable psychological benefits.

When developing a product or service, a company must consider customer expectations, its position relative to competitors, and the relationship between technical measures and customer needs.

Author: Ziaggi Fadhil Zahran

Also read related articles:

Operational Management: Definition, Purpose, Characteristics, Functions and Strategies

Understanding Strategy and Types, Purpose, and Examples

Definition of Distribution: Types, Channels, Objectives, Functions, Factors of Influence, and Strategy

Sales Strategy: Definition, Factors, and Benefits

Differentiation Strategy: Definition, Aspects, and Types!

Definition of Office Administration – Does Sinaumed’s already know what office administration is? Office administration is an activity that is directly related to the administration system within the scope of the office. The management system within a scope in this office is one part of management that provides information in accordance with the administrative fields needed to support the work of an activity effectively.

In order to understand it easily, we must know the meaning of office administration. There are many who give opinions in defining the notion of office administration. Well, Sinaumed’s can listen to the explanation in this article.

What is the definition of office administration?

What is the meaning of office administration? Office administration is a series of routine activities in an organization related to data and information management in order to achieve the goals of the organization systematically .

When viewed etymologically, the word ” Administration ” comes from Latin, namely ” Ad” which means intensive and ” ministrare” or which, if interpreted in Indonesian, means to help, serve , or fulfill . We need to know together, the notion of office administration is divided into two, namely the broad definition of office administration and narrow office administration.

Then what is meant by office administration in a narrow sense? In a narrow sense, office administration is all technical activities and has a main role in carrying out operational activities, presenting reports to the directors, and playing an important role in creating a more effective company organization.

Meanwhile, if viewed in a broad sense, office administration can be understood as planning, organizing, directing, administering and supervising various work related to the scope of work in the office as well as orderly and good administration.

What is the meaning of office administration in general? In general, office administration is an activity of financial planning, billing and recording, personnel, and distribution of goods and logistics within an organization. Generally, an employee who serves as office administration is referred to as an office administrator or office manager.

What is the meaning of office administration according to some experts? According to George Terry, a researcher and author entitled Principles of Management, office administration is planning, controlling and organizing work in an office and being a driving force for those who run it so that the goals that have been set can be achieved properly.

Another opinion was expressed by Prajudi Atmosudirdjo, Director of the first State Administration Agency, who stated that office administration is a combination of corporate management (office as a unit consisting of buildings, land, personnel and equipment) with operation management (work in the office).

What are the Duties of Office Administration?

WH Evans, an office administration expert, stated that the task of office administration is a function related to management and directing all stages of company operations regarding the use of information, memory, and organizational communication.

Then what is the main office administration task? So, his job is to recapitulate data, manage documents, and store documents in a structured manner. From this main task, we can derive several office administration tasks which include:

1. Communicate using the telephone

Office administrators generally have the most important tasks of communicating by telephone, receiving and outside telephone calls. In this task an administrator needs to have good communication skills. For small and medium sized offices, usually the mandatory task is answering the phone. Unlike big companies, usually there are other divisions such as customer service or what we usually know as customer service .

2. Make all the office agenda

With the task of communicating via telephone, raises the possibility of a partner wanting a meeting with the company’s management or also with other departments. Other duties of office administration are also needed to prepare the agenda for the activity. However, to schedule a meeting, further communication is needed with other departments so that the schedule can be arranged properly and there are no clashes with other schedules.

3. Data entry on the company

The next task that is important to implement in every office for this job is usually the problem of data entry or data recap. Transaction data from customers, consumer data, and other information that will be summarized. However, not everything is recapitulated alone. If the company already has other divisions, such as the warehouse division, the admin office task is usually just a recap that other divisions have been worked on.

A person serving as office administration is required to have deep thoroughness. Data such as addresses, telephone numbers, and others must be recapitulated to make it easier to search.

4. Create data files

The last task, so that data can be managed properly and easily, the data must be archived. This is also an office administration task. This allows document data and everything to be well managed.

What is the Scope of Work for Office Administration?

From the various office administration tasks above, we can actually predict what needs to be done. By knowing the scope or scope of office administration, we can prepare ourselves to learn what skills are needed later. The scope of office administration duties includes:

1. Office activities

This scope includes planning (planning) , organizing (organizing) , directing (actuating) , and controlling (controlling).

2. Office work facilities

This scope includes buildings or buildings, office locations, interiors, equipment, to the machines available in the office.

An administrator must be responsible for planning work for employees, supervising employees, and requesting the procurement of necessary facilities and infrastructure or repairs of office equipment that is already available.

What is the Purpose of Office Administration?

In general, the purpose of this office management process is so that the company’s goals can be achieved effectively and efficiently and meet the requirements from a technical, economic and psychological perspective.

1. Technical, namely having benefits and usability

2. Economical, namely the price that is appropriate or appropriate

3. Psychological, namely giving satisfaction

So, here are the complete office administration goals.

1. Providing complete data and information to parties who need it to carry out organizational tasks effectively and efficiently.
2. Supervise office and administrative work in order to ensure the proper implementation of quality standards, deadlines and procedures.
3. Implement company or department policies and provide good service standards in relation to management.
4. Communicate with employees regarding work performance to identify problems and their causes, and work to resolve these problems.
5. Provide training or work orders to employees.
6. Verify, monitor and evaluate work by making reports related to production, delivery and payroll activities.
7. Conducting the employee recruitment process, from interviewing to selecting employees.
8. Interpret and communicate all work procedures and company policies to all employees.

Meanwhile, GR Terry in his book entitled Office Management and Control , has his own views on the goals of office administration.

1. Provide all detailed and complete information and classify who, when and where it is needed for the proper and efficient implementation of the organization or company.
2. Keep records at minimum cost.
3. Providing administrative work effectively and efficiently.
4. Helping companies in good competition with competitors
5. Provide financial reports with minimal cost

Meanwhile, in general, the objectives of office administration include the following.

1. Implement and improve information technology capabilities so that the implementation of tasks runs effectively and efficiently.
2. Implement and improve document management capabilities in accordance with standard operating procedures that apply within a company.
3. Implement and improve the ability to manage financial administration ( accounting ), so that the process of managing financial aspects can be accounted for and reported.
4. Implement and improve the company’s services to relations with outsiders.
5. Implement and improve capabilities in planning, implementing, organizing, and evaluating the tasks that are the responsibility of each employee.
6. Implement and improve the ability to communicate in relation to external parties, of course with due regard to ethics and the environment.

What are the Functions of Office Administration?

According to Quible (2001) there are five types of administrative support functions in offices, namely routine, technical, analytical, interpersonal, and managerial functions. The following is a description of the office administration functions.

1. Routine Function

Routine functions are administrative functions that require thought and skill, which at least include filing and duplicating company goods

2. Technical Functions

The second function is a technical function that requires opinions, decisions, and qualified office skills for administrators

3. Function Analysis

The third function is the analysis function which requires critical and creative thinking as well as the ability to make decisions quickly and accurately.

4. Interpersonal Functions

The fourth function is the interpersonal function which requires analysis and assessment as a basis for deciding something as well as skills in communicating well with other people.

5. Managerial Functions

The last function is a managerial function that requires planning, organizing, measuring, and motivating employees

Meaning of Mushaf – Have you ever heard of the word pocket Mushaf or Al-Qur’an Mushaf? So, what is a Mushaf and how is it different from the Al-Qur’an? For Muslims, the word mushaf may already be familiar because it is often spoken in carrying out daily worship. The Mushaf is often equated with the Al-Qur’an which is a book and a guide for Muslims to carry out their daily lives. Though, both are different. Mushaf is a part of Al-Qur’an.

Meaning of Mushaf

Many Muslims are still confused about the meaning between the Mushaf and the Al-Qur’an, even to the point that there is an assumption that the Mushaf is the Al-Qur’an. Quoted from the book A Brief History of Al-Quran Mushaf Writing written by Cece Abdulwaly (2021: 18) the word mushaf is formed from the word shahifah which is the plural form is shaha’if or shuhuf .

Furthermore, in Jamharah al Lughah , Ibn Duraid al Azdi explained that shahifah is a whitish skin or thin sheet or plate on which writing is usually written. Meanwhile, according to Abu Nasr al-Jauhari in ash-Shihhah , shahifah is a book. The mention of this mushaf is because in it a number of sheets are collected which are flanked by two volumes.

So, the mushaf has the meaning of ma ushifa , meaning something that is collected in it with sheets filled with writing sandwiched between two volumes. While in terms, the Mushaf is the designation for books that are collected between two volumes from beginning to end with successive surahs and verses as collected during the time of Uthman ibn Affan Ra.

For Muslims mushaf itself can be interpreted as part of the book of the Qur’an. The appearance of the mushaf was a concern for the companions of the prophet after the death of the Prophet Muhammad and the occurrence of the Yamamah war which claimed many hafidz.

At the time of the caliph, Abu Bakr ash Shiddiq then invited Zaid bin Thabit to become a leader in order to collect the verses of the Al-Qur’an into one unit. However, Thabit refused because this was never taught by the Prophet Muhammad.

Abu Bakr gave Thabit an understanding and he also agreed to the idea, but this was not an easy matter. Zaid bin Thabit even posits that it is easier to move mountains than to collect verses of the Qur’an in one piece.

After the death of Abu Bakar ash Shiddiq, this mission continued until the caliph Uthman bin Affan. However, there were disputes from various regions regarding the compilation of the Qur’an. As explained in a hadith, Hudzaifah ibn al-Yaman came to Uthman ibn Affan. He led the people of Syria and Iraq in the conquest of Armenia and Azerbaijan. Hudzaifah was worried about their (his troops) dispute over qira’ah .

He advised Uthman: “O leader of the Muslims, save this people before they disagree about the book, as happened to the Jews and Christians”. Uthman then sent a messenger to Hafshah with the message: “Send us shuhuf (sheets). We will copy it into the mushafs and later we will return it to you.”

Next, Hafshah sent shuhuf to ‘Uthman, who then ordered Zaid ibn Thabit radhiyallahu anhu, Abdullah ibn al-Zubair radhiyallahu anhu, Sa’id ibn al-‘Ash and ‘Abdurrahman ibn al-Harith ibn Hisham radhiyallahu anhu to copy it in several Mushaf. Uthman told the three Quraysh in the group: “If you disagree with Zaid regarding the Qur’an, then write it in the Quraysh dialect, because the Qur’an was revealed in their language.”

They then copied the temperature in the manuscripts, Uthman returned the manuscript to Hafshah. After that, Uthman sent the manuscripts that they had copied to each area, and he ordered that apart from the Al-Qur’an, all sheets or manuscripts be burned (HR. Bukhari no. 4987).

 

The Form of Jurisprudence Mushaf from Time to Time

Indeed, the physical form of the Al-Qur’an mushaf has always been different over time. However, all are still called Mushaf and the law is the same.

1. The Prophet’s Period: Mushafs are just sheets with verses written on them

At the time of Rasulullah SAW, the form was only in the form of writing on animal skin, or on the fronds of dates, sometimes on bones, stones and so on. If we pay attention, the physical ablution of mushafs at the time of the Prophet SAW never appeared in the complete edition which consisted of more than 6000 verses, 114 letters and 30 chapters. Everything is more than sheets and the contents of the verses are only fragments. However, it is still called a mushaf that is holy and venerable, and the law on the mushaf still applies.

The question is, why at that time did the Mushaf not take the form of a book containing all the verses of the Al-Qur’an as a whole?

There are several answers and reasons, including:

First, because all the verses of the Qur’an have not been revealed. The verses were revealed piecemeal, not all at once. Even in one letter, the verses are still cut into several parts, and the revelation is rather random. Sometimes the front verses came down later, while the back verses went down first.

Second, the mushaf of the Qur’an had not been written in a book made of paper at that time, it did not mean that there was no paper yet, but because paper was not the only medium available, it was not too easy to obtain and the price was not as cheap as it is today.

Third, in the past, the Prophet Muhammad almost never ordered the writing of mushafs in one book bundle. Not even hinting at it. So that at first when the idea of ​​writing a mushaf in a bundle of books was voiced by Umar bin Al-Khattab radhiyallahuanhu, Abu Bakar Ash-Shiddiq who was then caliph refused flatly.

2. Manuscripts at the Time of the Caliphs

However, when Allah SWT expanded Abu Bakr’s chest when he heard Umar’s reasons for compiling the Al-Qur’an in one book bundle, the Mushaf which was only in the form of fragments or sheets with verses from the Al-Qur’an became a complete book.

Even so, the manuscript version of the sheets which contain only fragments of Al-Quran verses are still kept by each Companion personally.

Then the manuscripts of the sheets of each private collection were destroyed during the time of Caliph Uthman bin Al-Affan radhiyallahunahu. Because at that time Uthman wanted to make the manuscript writing sense uniform with a rasam known as the Utsamni rasam.

3. Manuscripts in the Digital Age

In the current digital era, mushafs also appear in a unique form, namely on screens, whether monitors, LCDs, or even cellphones and tablets. Electronic devices such as cell phones nowadays are very sophisticated and can be installed into the Al-Qur’an program or software.

However, there is a difference between HP and Al-Qur’an Mushaf which we know everyday in terms of activation. If it is activated, then the HP will display the verses of the Qur’an. Conversely, if it is turned off, of course the writing is no longer there.

So in this case, when we want to enter a public toilet and are forced to bring our cell phones because we are afraid that someone will lose them or take them, we have to turn off the cell phones. At least the Al-Qur’an program that has been installed must be turned off or deactivated temporarily.

Then what about the memory stored in it? Aren’t there verses of the Qur’an in the form of digital data?

The answer is simple. The cellphone that we have works very similar to our brain. Please know that the contents of our brains may contain Al-Qur’an data, either in the form of written or sound memories. A person who memorizes the Qur’an, for example, has thousands of verses of the Qur’an in his head.

Is it forbidden for a person who memorizes the Al-Qur’an to enter the toilet, on the grounds that he has digital data on the Al-Qur’an in his head? Then do you have to take off your head first to enter the toilet? Or could he simply switch off his memory from the Qur’an for a while?

What seems most plausible is that he did not temporarily activate his memorization of the Qur’an, either in voice or in writing. When the Al-Qur’an data memory in the brain is temporarily deactivated, basically there is no prohibition against entering the toilet.

Likewise with our HP. Even though there is 30 juz of digital data memory, both text and sound, maybe even video, as long as it’s not activated, of course, it won’t be a problem. What is unlawful is while hanging out in the toilet, we plug in our cell phones with the sound of reciting the Qur’an. Obviously it is haram and should be avoided.

 

Differences in Mushaf Writing Systems

In the Al-Qur’an Mushaf Writing system (Rasm al-Qur’an) there are two writing systems that are commonly used. First, the writing system with Rasm Qiyasi or Rasm Imla’i; is the writing of words according to their pronunciation or reading. Pronunciations written using Rasm Qiyasi are words that do not have a well-known and standard script. As for the words whose writing is already well-known and the standard of writing remains as well-known writing, so it is no different from the Manuscripts written by Rasm Usmani.

Some words whose writing is well-known include: Ar-Rahmaan (after the mim without alif), As-Salaah, az-Zakaah (alif written with wawu), ar-Ribaa (after ba’ in the form of wawu and alif), zaalika (after dzal without alif), and haa’ulaa’i (after ha’ nida’ without alif).

That is, there is not a single Koran written entirely with rasm qiyasi or rasm imla’i. For example, verses 2 and 3 of Surah Al-Baqarah. In these two verses, what is written with rasm qiyasi is al-kitaabu (after ta’ uses the alif) and razaqnaahum (after nun uses the alif). While zaalika and As-Salaah are still written in the same famous script as rasm usmani.

Mushafs written with Rasm Qiyasi or Imla’i include: Turkish Mushaf, Menara Kudus Mushaf (Turkish Mushaf), and Indonesian Mushaf of the Bahriyyah type.

Second, the Writing System with Rasm Usmani, namely the Koran writing system as it was written during the time of the third Caliph, Usman bin Affan, by a team led by Zaid bin Sabit. His name Rasm Usmani was attributed to the caliph Usman bin Affan as the caliph who ordered the rewriting of the Koran at that time for the unification of qiraat.

In Rasm Usmani there are two main narrations that are followed:

• History of Abu ‘Amr Ad-Dani, better known as Ad-Dani (d. 444 H) in the book Al-Muqni’ fi Ma’rifati Marsum Masahif Ahl al-Amsar.
• History of Abu Dawud Sulaiman bin Najah, known as Abu Dawud (d. 496 H.), in Mukhtasar at-Tabyin li Hija’ at-Tanzil.

In general, currently printed manuscripts circulating around the world are written using Rasm Usmani by selecting one of the two traditions, Ad-Dani or Abu Dawud. Indonesian Mushaf, Libyan Mushaf, Bombay Mushaf, and Iranian Mushaf follow Ad-Dani’s history. While the Mushaf of Medina, the Mushaf of Egypt, and the Mushafs of other countries which refer to both.

1. Coverage of Rasm Usmani

Many people misunderstand Rasm Usmani. Among them there are those who understand that Rasm Usmani is only one version. In fact, as explained above, in Rasm Usmani there are two main narrations, the narrations of ad-Dani and the narrations of Abu Dawud, who are known as ash-Syaikhani fi ‘ilm ar-Rasm ‘Usmani (Two credible scholars in Rasm-Usmani).

Many also misunderstand the scope of Rasm Usmani. They thought that Rasm Usmani included verses complete with vowels and punctuation, as written in the Medina Mushaf. As a result, they considered that apart from the Medina manuscripts, including the Indonesian manuscripts, they did not use Rasm Usmani.

Then, what is the scope of Rasm Usmani? The scope of Rasm Usmani is only found in the body of the verse, without letter dots, vowels or any punctuation.

Let’s look at the example on page 3 in a 15-line format printed mushaf, which contains QS. Al-Baqarah 6-16. The differences in Rasm Usmani contained in it are only in 4 words, Absaarihim, gisyaawatun verse 7, thugyaanihim verse 15, and tijaaratuhum verse 16. Those who follow Ad-Dani’s rawayat write these four words using alif for long readings, while those who choose the history of Abu Dawud write them down without alif.

So, from the perspective of Rasm Usmani the difference between the Indonesian manuscripts which chose Ad-Dani’s narration, and the Medina Manuscripts which chose the narration of Abu Dawud, was relatively small. The biggest difference is in the vowel system and the punctuation system used.

2. Differences in Harakat and Punctuation Systems

The second and third differences are the differences in the vowel and punctuation systems. We discuss both together, because they are interrelated. Harakat includes fathah, dammah, kasrah, fathatain, dammatain, and kasratain. While the punctuation marks include, mad marks, tajwid reading marks, head of the hamzah.

To simplify the explanation, we will compare the two manuscripts, namely the Indonesian manuscripts and the Medina manuscripts. There are differences in almost every line between these two manuscripts.

The vowel system in the Medina Mushaf does not recognize long vowels, so for words that contain long readings which are written in rasm usmani by removing the mad letter, a small alif is written after fathah, a small ya’ after kasrah, and a small wawu after dammah. Meanwhile, in the Indonesian Mushaf, only one sign is enough, with standing fathah, standing kasrah, and inverted dammah.

The punctuation system for the qata’ hamzah, in the Medina Mushaf is given the head of the hamza. Hamzah wasal, given a sign shaped like a sad. As for the Indonesian Mushaf, neither the qata’ hamzah nor the wasal hamzah is marked.

For long readings on the alif, the Medina Mushaf adds the head of the hamzah which is given a fathah before the alif, while the Indonesian Mushaf only gives a fathah standing above the alif which is a hamza. Here there is a difference, in the Medina Mushaf, the alif is indeed an alif, while in the Indonesian Mushaf, the alif is actually a hamza which is written in the form of an alif.

Therefore, it is not correct to judge that the vowel and punctuation systems of certain manuscripts are more correct than others. Each has a vowel and punctuation system that is followed. As long as it leads to the correct reading of the Qur’an, then everything is permissible and justified.

 

3. Differences in Signs of Waqf

Among us must have found several Korans with waqf signs that are different from one another. Or surely we have been asked by people regarding the different waqf signs between the Medinan Koran and the Indonesian Koran.

The Medina Mushaf has 4,273 waqf marks. They are all in the middle of the verse. Because the Medina Mushaf follows the opinion that stopping at the end of a verse is included in the hasan waqf, even though at the end of a verse that has a close relationship with the next verse.

The Indonesian Mushaf has a total of 7,221 waqf marks, 5,074 in the middle of the verse, and 2,147 at the end of the verse.

The Libyan Mushaf has 9,947 waqf marks, 4,914 in the middle of the verses, and 5,033 at the end of the verses.

Both Indonesian and Libyan Mushafs still put the waqf mark at the end of the verse. The difference is that the Indonesian Mushaf affixes a waqf mark at the end of the verse that has a relationship with the next verse. While the Libyan Mushaf actually affixes the waqf mark at the end of a verse in a verse that has no connection with the next verse. So that the number of waqf signs at the end of the verse is double compared to the Indonesian Mushaf.

QS example. Al-Baqarah 34: wa idz qulnaa lil malaa’ikatis juduu li aadama fasajaduu illaa ibliisa abaa was takbara wa kaana minal kaafiriin.

Manuscripts of Medina without waqf marks until the end of the verse. Mushaf turkish waqf on the word devil. Mushaf Libya waqf on the word fasajaduu. Mushaf Indonesia, endowments to the devil, and wastakbara. In this example, the difference in waqf does not cause a difference in the meaning of the verse.

Examples that result in slight changes to the meaning of verses, among others, are found in QS. Ali ‘Imran 7: huwal ladzii anzala ‘alaikal kitaaba minhu aayaatum muhkamaatun hunna ummul kitaabi wa ukharu mutasyabihaat.

Manuscripts in general, including Indonesian manuscripts, waqaf in the word mutasyabihaat. While the Mushaf of Libya and Morocco, the waqf is in the word minhu, and the word mutasyaabihaat.

If the waqaf is in the word mutasyaabihaat, then the meaning of the verse: It is He who sent down the Book (the Koran) to you. Among them are muhkamat verses, which are the main points of the Book and others are mutasyabihat. Damir on the word minhu returns to the word al-Kitab.

But if the waqaf is in the word minhu, then the damir returns to Allah, so the meaning of the verse becomes: He is the one who sent down the Book (Qur’an) to you from His side. (In it) there are muhkamat verses, those are the main points of the Book and others are mutasyabihat.

Which one to follow? All of them may be followed, because they are based on references from credible waqaf-ibtida’ books and commentary books. And all of them are justifiable.

Understanding Maps – Maps can be presented in a variety of different ways, ranging from conventional printed maps to digital maps that appear on a computer screen. The term map comes from the Greek word mappa which means table cloth or cloth. But in general, the meaning of a map is a sheet of all or part of the earth’s surface on a flat plane that is reduced using a certain scale. Check out a more detailed explanation of the following map:

A. Definition of Map

However, in general the meaning of a map is a sheet of all or part of the earth’s surface on a flat plane that is reduced using a certain scale. A map is a two-dimensional representation of a three-dimensional space. The science of making maps is called cartography. Many maps have a scale, which determines how large objects on the map actually are. A collection of several maps is called an atlas.

The following are some definitions of maps according to experts, including:

• According to Erwin Raisz, a map is a conventional depiction of the earth’s surface, which is scaled down with various appearances and added writings as identification.
• According to the ICA (International Cartographic Association) Map is a picture or representation of selected abstract appearance elements from the earth’s surface that have something to do with the earth’s surface or celestial bodies, which are generally depicted on a flat plane and scaled or scaled.
• According to Aryono Prihandito (1998) Map is a picture of the earth’s surface with a certain scale, drawn on a flat plane through a certain projection system.
• According to the National Coordinating Agency for Surveys and Mapping (Bakosurtanal 2005) Maps are a vehicle for storing and presenting data on environmental conditions, and are a source of information for planners and decision-makers at stages of development.

Sinaumed’s can study maps and world history through the book Spym: 100 History on Maps by Il-Ung Jeong which is below.

 

B. Map Function

In general, a map is interpreted as a conventional depiction of the pattern of the earth which is depicted as if seen from above there is a flat plane through a projection field equipped with writing for identification. Map implies communication. This means that it is a signal or channel between the sender of the message (map maker) and the recipient of the message (map user). Thus maps are used to send messages in the form of information about the reality of geographical phenomena.

A map is basically a data that is designed to be able to produce geographic information through an organizing process of collaborating with other data related to the earth to analyze, predict and produce cartographic images. Spatial information about the earth is very complex, but in general geographic data contains 4 important aspects, namely (Zhou, 1998): Locations related to space, are spatial objects that are unique to the coordinate system (projection of a map) Attributes (features materials), information explaining the necessary spatial objects. Spatial relations, logical or quantitative relationships between space objects. Time is the time for data acquisition, attribute data and space.

Mapping is a process of presenting information on the surface of the Earth in the form of facts, the real world, both the shape of the earth’s surface and its natural resources, based on the map scale, map projection system, and the symbols of the presented elements of the Earth’s surface. In general, the map function is as follows:

• Serves to indicate the position or location of a place on the surface of the earth.
• Serves to show the size (area, distance) and direction of a place on the surface of the earth.
• Serves to describe the forms on the surface of the earth, such as continents, countries, mountains, rivers and other forms.
• Serves to help researchers before conducting a survey to determine the condition of the area to be studied.
• Serves to present data about the potential of an area.
• Serves as an analytical tool to get a conclusion.
• Serves as a tool to explain proposed plans.
• Serves as a tool to study the mutual relationship between geographical phenomena (symptoms) on the earth’s surface.

Sinaumed’s can also find out various facts about countries around the world through the Amazing Activity Book! : A map packed with maps and puzzles in it.

 

C. Types of Maps

Compilation and placement of edge information is not an easy thing, because all the information located around the map must show balance. Of the various types of maps, in general, they are only divided into two major groups. The division of this map type is based on the content and scale of the map. The division is as follows.

1. Types of Maps based on their contents

a. General Map

Displays the entire surface of the earth in terms of physical nature and man-made. This map has an overview of the information in general. For example topographic maps, earth like maps, chorographic maps, and others. A general map is a type of map that describes the appearance of the earth, either natural or cultural phenomena. General maps are divided into three, namely topographic maps, chorographic maps, and world or geographic maps.

A topographic map is a type of map that depicts the earth’s surface complete with relief. The depiction of the relief of the earth’s surface on the map is drawn in the form of a contour line. A contour line is a line on a map that connects points of the same elevation.

A chorographic map is a type of map that depicts all or part of the earth’s surface which is general in nature and is usually of medium scale. An example of a choographic map is an atlas. A world map or geography is a general type of map that is very small scale with a very wide area coverage.

b. Custom Maps (thematic maps)

Displays certain appearance information. The use of symbols corresponds to the theme of the map title. Examples of land use maps, population density maps, distribution maps of tourist objects, and others.

2. Types of Maps Based on the Scale

a. Cadastral map

Cadastral map is a type of map that has a scale between 1: 100 to 1: 5,000. Usually, this map is used to describe land area and land certificates.

b. Large scale map

This type of map is a map that has a scale between 1: 5,000 to 1: 250,000. This map is used to describe narrow areas, for example village maps, village maps, district maps, and city maps.

c. Medium scale map

Medium scale maps have a scale between 1:250,001 to 1:500,000. The area covered on this map includes provinces, islands, and so on.

d. Small scale map

This type of map has a scale between 1:500,001 to 1:1,000,000. The area drawn is quite large, for example one country.

c. Geographic scale map

This last type of map has a scale smaller than 1:1,000,000. Due to its small scale, the area included in the map is even wider. Maps that have this small scale are usually continent maps and world maps.

3. Map based on shape or symmetry

a. Flat maps or two-dimensional maps, or regular maps, or planimetric maps

A map that is flat and made on a flat surface like cloth. This map is depicted using different colors or symbols and others.

b. Embossed maps or three-dimensional maps or stereometric maps

The map that is made is almost the same and even the actual situation on earth. Making maps arise by using 3-dimensional shadows so that the shapes of the earth’s surface look like the original.

c. Digital map

Is a map of the results of digital data processing stored in a computer. These maps can be stored on a diskette or CD-ROM. Example: satellite imagery, aerial photography.

d. Line map

A map that presents natural data and man-made features in the form of points, lines and areas.

e. Photo map

Map generated from an aerial photo mosaic equipped with contour lines, names and legends.

 

D. Elements on the Map

Map is a tool in conveying spatial information. Based on this function, a map should be equipped with various components or completeness elements that aim to make it easier for users to read or use the map. Some components of map completeness that are generally found on maps, for example, are:

1. Title

Reflects both the content and the type of the map. Title writing is usually at the top center, top right, or bottom. However, as much as possible put it on the top right. Legend Legend is a description of the symbols that are key to understanding the map.

2. Orientation or Direction Signs

In general, north is indicated by an arrow pointing up on the map. It is located in the appropriate place where if there are latitude and longitude, the coordinates can be used as directions.

3. Scale

Scale is the ratio of the distance on the map to the actual distance on the ground. The scale is written under the map title, outside the outline, or below the legend. The scale is divided into 3, namely:

• Number scale. For example 1: 2,500,000. This means that every 1 cm of distance on the map is equal to 25 km of actual distance units.
• Line scale. This scale is made in the form of horizontal lines that have a certain length and each segment is 1 cm or more to represent a certain distance desired by the map maker.
• Verbal scale, which is a scale written in words.

4. Symbols

Map symbol is a sign or picture that represents the appearance of the earth’s surface which is contained on the appearance map, the types of map symbols include:

• Point symbol, used to represent place or positional data Line symbol, used to represent data related to distance
• Area symbol, used to represent a certain area with a symbol that covers a certain area
• The flow symbol is used to express flow or motion.
• The bar symbol is used to state a price/compared to other prices/values.
• Circle symbol, used to express the quantity (amount) in the form of a percentage.
• The ball symbol is used to represent volume, the larger the ball symbol indicates the greater the volume and conversely the smaller the ball symbol means the smaller the volume.

 

5. Color Map

Map colors are used to distinguish features or objects on the earth’s surface, to give the quality or quantity of symbols on a map, and for map aesthetic purposes. The symbol color on the map consists of 8 colors, namely:

• The green color indicates an area that has a height of less than 200 m. Usually the shape of the earth’s surface found at an altitude of <200 m is dominated by lowlands. The lowlands in Java are found along the north and south coasts.
• The red color indicates an active railway/mountain. Red color is often found on maps of a province.
• The light green color indicates an area that has an altitude between 200–400 m above sea level. The shape of the earth’s surface in this area is in the form of a sloping area accompanied by wavy and hilly forms of the earth’s surface. The distribution of this form of face is almost complete over the lowlands.
• The yellow color indicates an area that has an altitude between 500-1000 m above sea level. The shape of the earth’s surface in this area is dominated by plateaus and hills and low mountains. The distribution of this landform is on the central edge of Central Java Province and is most extensive in the southeast of Sukoharjo Regency.
• Light brown color indicates areas that have an altitude between 1000-1500 m above sea level. The dominant form of the earth’s surface in this area is medium mountains accompanied by low mountains. The distribution of this front shape is in the central part of Central Java, such as around Bumiayu, Banjarnegara, Temanggung, Wonosobo, Salatiga and Tawangmangu.
• The brown color indicates areas that have an altitude of more than 1500 m above sea level. The shape of the earth’s surface in this area is dominated by relatively high mountains. The spread of these mountains is mostly in the central part of Central Java.
• Whitish blue color The blue color shows the color of the appearance of the waters. The blue-white color indicates water areas with a depth of less than 200 m. The shape of the seabed in this area is dominated by relatively gentle slopes. The zone in this region is called the neritic zone. The spread of this zone is around the coast.
• The light blue color indicates areas of seawater that have depths between 200-2000 m.
• Dark blue color The dark blue color indicates sea waters with a depth of more than 2000 m.

6. Type of Letters (Lettering)

Lettering serves to reinforce the meaning of existing symbols. Types of use of lettering:

• Hipsographic objects are written in upright letters, for example: Surakarta
• Hydrographic objects are written in italics, for example: the Java Sea

7. Astronomical Lines

Astronomical lines consist of latitudes and longitudes which are used to indicate the location of a place or region which are formed in opposite directions to one another so as to form a vector indicating the astronomical location.

8. Insets

An inset is a small map that is inserted on the main map. Types of insets include: Location pointer inset, serves to show the location of areas that are not yet recognized Explanatory inset, serves to enlarge areas that are considered important Connecting inset, serves to connect areas that are cut off on the main map

9. Outline Map

Map outlines are lines to delimit map space and to place astronomical lines, in an orderly and correct manner, on the map.

10. Source and Year of Manufacture

The map source is the reference from which the map data was obtained.

11. Latitude and Longitude

Latitude is a line that crosses from west to east or from east to west. Longitude is a line that extends from north-south or south-north.

 

Recommended Books & Articles Related to Maps

Source: from various sources

State Ministries Are – Most of the existing ministries have undergone various changes, including mergers, separations, name changes, and also dissolution (either temporarily or permanently). The total ministries themselves are almost always different in each cabinet, starting with only a dozen until they once reached hundreds.

Before finally being determined in Law Number 39 of 2008, namely a maximum number of 34 ministries. In its journey, the formation of ministries in Indonesia has always considered political power, ideology and ethnicity.

During the era of struggle for independence and parliamentary democracy, there were 4 (four) political parties, namely the Indonesian National Party, Masjumi, Nahdlatul Ulama, and the Indonesian Socialist Party. Where, the four parties are competing against each other in grabbing ministry positions. After 1955, the Indonesian Communist Party became an additional force and political arena of Indonesia.

During the New Order era, namely development cabinets I to VII, there was only one dominant political force, namely the Working Group (Golkar). Meanwhile, in the reform era, various parties took turns in power. For example, the Working Group (Golkar), the National Awakening Party (PKB), the Indonesian Democratic Party of Struggle and the Democratic Party.

Where, these parties are 4 (four) major parties that have occupied the top leadership of the country. When viewed according to ethnic composition, the composition of ministers in the period 1945 to 1970 was dominated by the Javanese, after which it was followed by the Minangkabau and Sundanese tribes.

Two ethnic groups originating from eastern Indonesia, namely Minahasa and Maluku, are groups of people who contributed a lot to Indonesia’s independence. Throughout its history, the Ministry has used a variable nomenclature. During the New Order era, the nomenclature used was department, state minister’s office, and coordinating minister’s office.

In 1998, the terms state ministry and coordinating ministry began to be used, while the term department was retained. since the enactment of Law Number 39 of 2008 and Presidential Regulation Number 47 of 2009 stated that all Ministry nomenclatures were returned to being Ministries just like in the early days of independence.

The process of changing back this nomenclature began during the United Indonesia Cabinet II. So, in order to find out the complete discussion regarding the following Indonesian state ministries, the discussion has been presented below.

Definition of Indonesian Ministry of State

The Indonesian state ministry is an Indonesian government institution that deals with certain affairs in government. The ministry is domiciled in the national capital, namely Jakarta and is under the responsibility of the President.

The purpose of establishing the Indonesian state ministries is to assist the President in running the state government. Where, each ministry has its own field that handles certain affairs and the tasks and functions are different for each field. Each field in the Indonesian state ministries can improve performance through:

• Create an online application to measure the action plan.
• Improving the quality of evaluation of performance accountability in each performance unit.
• Improving planning to improve the quality and utilization of reports.
• Strengthen the implementation of performance culture in each unit.
• Synchronizing strategic goals and performance indicators of Indonesian state ministries.

Legal Basis of the Ministry of State of Indonesia

The legal basis of the Indonesian state ministry is in chapter 5 of article 17 of the 1945 Constitution which states that:

• The president is assisted by Indonesian state ministries.
• Ministers are appointed and dismissed by the President.
• Each ministry or minister is in charge of certain affairs in government.
• The establishment, change, and dissolution of Indonesian state ministries are regulated in the 1945 Constitution.

Basic arrangements regarding Indonesian State Ministries are explained in law number 39 of 2008 concerning State Ministries. Meanwhile, further provisions regarding the duties, functions and organizational structure of ministries are regulated by a Presidential Regulation (Perpres).

Formation and Amendment of Indonesian State Ministries

Based on article 12, the President forms the ministries of foreign affairs, home affairs and defense as stipulated in the 1945 Constitution. The formation of these ministries takes into account several things, including:

• Effectiveness and efficiency.
• The scope of duties and the proportionality of the duties of state ministries.
• Continuity, integration of task implementation, and alignment of state ministries.
• The development of the global environment of Indonesian state ministries.

The total of all ministries is at most 34. Regarding the change and dissolution of ministries, the President cannot just do it. Changes as a result of the separation or merger of ministries must be made with the consideration of the People’s Representative Council (DPR).

Ministries can be dissolved by the President by asking for the consideration of the People’s Representative Council (DPR). With the exception, ministries that handle legal, religious, financial and security affairs are required to have the approval of the House of Representatives (DPR).

Functions of Indonesian State Ministries

The functions of Indonesian state ministries are indeed very diverse. Where, ministries or ministers have a role that cannot be separated from the planning, administration and operational activities of the Indonesian state.

Under the direct supervision of the President, ministers carry out tasks related to state affairs aiming at the advancement of the Indonesian state. As, according to article 8 of the law of the Republic of Indonesia Number 39 of 2008 concerning state ministries, the functions of the Indonesian state ministries include:

1. In carrying out its duties, the Ministry has responsibility for this matter as stated in article 5 paragraph 1 reads:

• • Formulation, determination, and implementation of policies for their fields.
  • Carry out the management of state property or wealth which is his responsibility.
  • Carry out supervision on the course of tasks in their field.
  • Carry out technical activities from the center to the regions.

2. In carrying out its duties, the Ministry that carries out the affairs as stated in the Law article 5 paragraph 2 which contains:

• • Formulate, establish, and carry out policies for their fields.
  • Manage the property or wealth of the state for which it is responsible.
  • carry out supervision and carry out tasks in their fields.
  • Conduct technical guidance and supervision on the course of affairs in regional ministries.
  • Carry out technical activities on a national scale.

3. In carrying out its duties, the Ministry that carries out the affairs as referred to in the law article 5 paragraph 3, reads:

• • Formulate and establish policies for the field.
  • Coordinating and synchronizing the course of policies in their respective fields.
  • Manage the property or wealth of the state for which it is responsible.
  • Supervise the course of tasks in their field.

Duties of Indonesian State Ministries

Regarding the Indonesian state ministries, this has been regulated in the law of the republic of Indonesia Number 39 of 2008 which states that the task of the Ministry is to carry out certain government affairs in order to assist the President in administering state government.

Of course, in carrying out their duties the state ministries must be based on the laws and regulations that have been stipulated. The duties of the Ministry of State of Indonesia, including the following:

• Following and coordinating the course of policies and programs that have been determined in certain fields which are the responsibility of the division.
• Accommodate all problems that arise and seek solutions to these problems by following all developments in the conditions of the field that must be coordinated.
• Carry out coordination with various director generals and other institutional leaders in order to establish cooperation in overcoming problems related to areas coordinated within the country.

The authority of the Ministry of State of Indonesia

A Ministry certainly has power or authority, as well as Indonesian state ministries that have authority including the following:

• Coordinating the provision of household and protocol services to the President and Vice President.
• Perform certain tasks delegated by the President.
• Running affairs in his power with the existing executive authority.
• Other authorities that are adjusted to the provisions and regulations of the Law that have been made and apply.
• Having authority or power in the form of executive power, namely power as the executor of the law. This is because those who do have the authority in the form of implementing statutory regulations that have been established and determined by the institution that holds legislative power, carrying out the administration of government with the President and Vice President, and implementing state order both at home and abroad.

Rights and Obligations of the Ministry of State of Indonesia

The Ministry of State’s right is the right to govern the people. Meanwhile, the responsibility of the state ministries is to organize the state together with the President and vice president. This is because, being included in the executive branch, Indonesian state ministries have rights and obligations.

Classification of the Ministry of State of Indonesia

According to the Presidential Regulation, the classification of Indonesian state ministries, including the following:

1. The Ministry that Handles Governmental Affairs Nomenclature

The following ministries handle nomenclature government affairs, including:

• Ministry of Internal Affairs
• Ministry of Foreign Affairs
• Ministry of Defense

2. Ministry in charge of State Administration Affairs

Ministries that handle state government affairs as national development goals, namely:

• Ministry of Religion
• Ministry of Law and Human Rights
• Ministry of Finance
• Ministry of Education and Culture
• Ministry of research, technology and higher education
• Ministry of Health
• Ministry of Social Affairs
• Ministry of Labour
• Ministry of Industry
• Ministry of Trade
• Ministry of Energy and Mineral Resources
• Minister For Public Works and Human Settlements
• Ministry of Transportation
• Ministry of Communication and Informatics
• Ministry of Agriculture
• Ministry of environment and forestry
• Marine and Fisheries Ministry
• Ministry of villages, development of underdeveloped areas and transmigration
• Ministry of agrarian and spatial planning

3. The Ministry that Handles Affairs in the Context of Sharpening, Coordinating, and Synchronizing Government Programs

This ministry is tasked with managing state property and assets and carrying out supervision over the implementation of tasks in its field, consisting of:

• Ministry of national development planning
• Ministry of Administrative Reform and bureaucratic reform
• Ministry of state-owned enterprises
• Ministry of cooperatives and small and medium enterprises
• Ministry of tourism
• The Ministry of Women’s Empowerment and Child Protection
• Ministry of Youth and Sports
• Ministry of State Secretariat

4. Coordinating Ministries Have the Task of Synchronizing and Coordinating the Affairs of the Respective Ministries

The coordinating ministry has the task of synchronizing and coordinating the affairs of the respective Ministries, including the following:

• Coordinating ministry for political law security commander
• Coordinating Ministry for Economic Affairs
• The coordinating ministry for human development and culture
• Coordinating ministry for maritime affairs

The formation of the Indonesian state ministries above is one of the efforts in mapping the duties and functions of state institutions as their destination point so that the implementation of government affairs can run well and in a coordinated manner.

Organizational Structure of Indonesian State Ministries

Within the Indonesian state ministries, the organizational structure of the Indonesian state ministries has been regulated in law Number 39 of 2008, including the following:

1. The organizational structure of the ministries dealing with the fields as referred to in Article 5 paragraph 1 is composed of the following elements:

• • The leader is the minister
  • The assistant leader is the secretariat general
  • The principal task executor is the directorate general
  • The supervisor is the inspectorate general
  • Supporters are the body and the center
  • Implementation of main tasks in the regions and foreign missions in accordance with statutory regulations

2. The organizational structure of the ministries carrying out the affairs as referred to in Article 5 paragraph 2, among others, are as follows:

• • The leader, namely the minister
  • Acting leader, namely the secretariat general
  • Executor, namely the directorate general
  • Superintendent, namely the inspectorate general
  • Supporters, namely the center or agency

3. The ministries that handle religious, financial, legal and security affairs as referred to in Article 5 paragraph 2 also have elements of carrying out basic tasks in the regions.
4. The organizational structure of the ministries that carry out the affairs as referred to in Article 5 paragraph 3, among others are as follows:

• • The leader, namely the minister
  • Assistant leader, namely the secretariat of the ministry
  • Executor, namely deputy
  • Superintendent, namely the inspectorate

5. Based on article 10, states that if there is a workload that requires special handling, the President can appoint deputy ministers in certain Ministries.

Requirements to Become Part of the Ministry of State of Indonesia

As discussed in the previous explanation, ministries or ministers are appointed by a President. To be appointed as part of the Ministry, a person must fulfill several conditions. The following has presented a number of requirements to become part of the Indonesian state ministries, including:

• Indonesian Citizen (WNI)
• Have faith in God Almighty
• Loyal to Pancasila as the basis of the state, the 1945 Constitution, and the ideals of the proclamation of independence
• Physically and mentally healthy
• Have good integrity and personality
• Never been sentenced to prison according to a court decision that has permanent legal force, for committing a crime punishable by imprisonment for 5 (five) years or more. Persons who have been sentenced to prison for political reasons and have received rehabilitation are exempt from this provision.

Some of the conditions for becoming part of Indonesian state ministries are not meant to limit the President’s right to appoint a minister, but emphasize that a minister who is appointed must have good integrity and personality.

However, it is hoped that the President will also need to pay attention to competence in the field of ministry duties and leadership experience that must be possessed by a minister, and be able to work together as an assistant to the President.

When referring to the requirements to become part of the ministers described above, of course there is no age requirement to become a minister. This means that a President may appoint a young minister as long as the young man fulfills the specified requirements and has good integrity and personality.

In addition, it is hoped that the President will also need to pay attention to the competence and duties of the Ministry. As well as leadership experience that must be owned by a minister and be able to work together as an assistant to the President.

List of Non-Ministerial Government Institutions

Not only does it have state ministries, Indonesia also has Non-Ministry Institutions or also called LPNK in implementing government programs. Non-ministerial government agencies created by the President to support and assist in carrying out certain tasks.

LPNK is directly under the President and is responsible for reporting all activities and work programs directly to the President through the ministers.

The existence of LPNK has been regulated in Presidential Regulation (Perpres) Number 103 of 2001. This rule regulates all matters related to LPNK, starting from its position, duties, functions, objectives, authorities, work procedures, and organizational structure. The following are several LPNKs in Indonesia, including:

• The Investment Coordinating Board (BKPM), deals directly with the coordinating minister for the economy.
• The National Archives of the Republic of Indonesia (ANRI) is in direct contact with the minister for the utilization of the state apparatus and bureaucratic reform.
• Geospatial Information Agency (BIG)
• Meteorology, Climatology and Geophysics Agency (BMKG).
• State Civil Service Agency (BKN).

This is the discussion about the Indonesian state ministries, starting from their understanding to a number of other things that you must know. Hopefully the discussion above can help and add insight into knowledge about the ranks of ministry institutions in Indonesia.

If you want to find books about Indonesian government, then you can get them at sinaumedia.com . Reading lots of books and articles will never hurt you, because Sinaumed’s will get #MoreWithReading information and knowledge.

Author: Siti Badriyah

Understanding Geography, Aspects & Objects of Study – As with other sciences, the object of study of geography has its own scope of study that is different from other disciplines. The object of study can be divided into two, namely material objects and formal objects. See a more complete explanation, here’s Sinaumed’s!

Definition of Geography

The word geography comes from the Greek words  geo and  graphein . Geo means earth and  graphein means writing. So, geography is matters or science related to the earth, starting from human life that lives on earth, aspects of geography, to objects of study of geography. Meanwhile, according to the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), geography is the science of the earth’s surface, climate, population, flora, fauna, and the results obtained from the earth.

Geography itself can be regarded as one of the sciences about the earth which is quite attractive to many people in this world. It is the position of geography that makes scientists want to dig deeper into what geography is. So, so that you know more about geography, then you can see this article which will discuss the object of study of geography to aspects of geography.

What is the definition of a geographic object?

Basically the earth that we live in is the objects of the study of geography.

The object of study of geography is the geosphere, which includes the location and symptoms or phenomena that occur. A phenomenon viewed from a geographical perspective is always integrated with other sciences.

Geographical location is divided into two, namely physiographic location and sociographic location. Examples of physiographical locations are astronomical, maritime, climatological, and geomorphological locations. Meanwhile, examples of sociographic location are social, economic, political, and cultural. The material objects in this study called the geosphere include:

1. The lithosphere (hard layer), which is the outer layer of the earth or commonly called the earth’s crust in geology.
2. The atmosphere (air layers), weather and climate are studied in climatology and meteorology, etc.
3. The hydrosphere (water layer), in the form of oceans, rivers, lakes, and groundwater.
4. The biosphere (the living layer), consists of animals, plants and humans as a community, not individuals.
5. Pedosphere (soil layer), a layer of rock that has undergone physical, organic, or chemical weathering.

Human geography, also known as social geography, is a branch of science that studies the relationship and mutual influence between nature and humans.

This branch of human geography emphasizes human activity as the main object of its study. The main object of the study of human geography includes aspects of population, activity aspects which include economic, political, social and cultural aspects. Branches of Human Geography:

• Population geography
  Population geography is a branch of human geography whose object of study is the spatial aspect of the population. The object of this study includes distribution, density, sex comparison, comparison of humans to land area and so on.
• Economic geography
  Economic geography is a branch of human geography that discusses human efforts to exploit natural resources and increase the added value of goods to meet needs and analyze patterns of location, distribution and distribution of industrial and trade activities.
• Political geography
  Political geography is a branch of human geography whose field of study is the spatial aspect of government and statehood which includes regional and international relations of government or statehood on the surface of the earth.
• Settlement geography
  Settlement geography is a branch of human geography that discusses the development of settlements in an area and the pattern of their development on the surface of the earth.

Benefits of Studying Geography

There are many benefits of studying this science study. The following are some of the benefits of studying geography, including:

1. Insight in the study of science trains living things to project or position themselves in a space called the earth. The orientation includes all aspects of space, namely direction, distance, area, and shape.
2. Perception of relations between symptoms in studying geography, we are required to observe each other phenomena and symptoms that occur in a landscape or region so that we can conclude the relationships.
3. Mapping the potential of the area by studying this regional science study, humans can map areas that have certain characteristics in accordance with the principles in geography that have been mentioned previously.
4. Global understanding requires someone to know all the areas that exist on earth. That is, a person does not only know about the area where he lives, but can know all aspects that exist on the surface of this earth.
5. A feeling of love arises and a desire to protect after knowing all the potential of the area and all the aspects that this earth has, of course, a feeling of love for God’s beautiful creation will arise. This feeling of love can lead to a sense of belonging so that a person will tend to keep his territory undisturbed.

In an effort to study various things that happen to the environment on the earth’s surface, this book is here to discuss various environmental issues on a local to global scale.

 

Various Kinds of Geography Study Objects

The object of study of geography itself consists of conditions and all processes that take place on the earth’s surface; Organizing a region and space on earth; Interpretation of natural and social landscapes; Human relations with different environments, both cultural and natural; Human interaction with processes on the surface of the earth.

From some of these scientific disciplines, it is possible to have material objects that may be the same in the field of study, but will be different in their formal objects. For example in geography, geology and geophysics, these three sciences have the same material object as making the object of the planet Earth a non-physical study, but the formal studies are different from one another. There are 2 objects of study of geography, namely material objects and formal objects. The following is an explanation of the 2 geographic objects:

1. Material Objects

The definition of a material object of geography is a material object of geography in the form of the phenomenon of the geosphere (earth surface) which consists of the atmosphere (air layer), lithosphere and pedosphere (rock and soil layers), hydrosphere (about waters), biosphere (plant and animal world) and anthroposphere ( man).

• The atmosphere or air that surrounds the earth, the atmosphere has a thickness of about 1,000 KM and is composed of several elements, including 78.08% nitrogen, 20.95% oxygen, and 0.034% carbon dioxide. Now, in deepening knowledge about the layers of the earth’s atmosphere, meteorology and climatology are needed.
• The lithosphere or earth’s crust, the earth itself is the home where all creatures on the earth’s surface live. The earth consists of several layers of soil, rock and minerals that make up the earth’s crust or earth’s crust. In studying lithosphere science we need to deepen knowledge such as geology, geomorphology and soil science.
• Hydrosphere (water), Almost the entire surface of the earth is water. In studying the science of the hydrosphere this can be done with the branch of hydrology for fresh water, for example such as limnology which studies lakes, hydrometeorology to study the water content in the air, flufial hydrology (rivers) and groundwater hydrology (groundwater hydrology) as well as oceanography the science which studying seawater.
• Biosger (animals and plants), this biosphere can be studied through biogeography, ecology and anthropology.
• Anthroposphere (human), in studying this geographical material object, we can understand that a phenomenon when viewed from the point of view of geography, will always be integrated with other sciences.

The location in the study of this object can be distinguished into a physiographic location and a sociographic location, for example, the physiographic location includes astronomical location, climatological location, maritime location and geomorphological location. Meanwhile, the sociographic location is the social, economic, political and cultural location.

So in reality the material object of geography includes phenomena that exist and occur on earth, for example, such as rocks, soil, earthquakes, climate, air, flora and fauna related to human life. Thus, if a phenomenon is examined from a geographical point of view, it will always be integrated with other sciences. As with natural disasters, which are discussed in the book below.

2. Formal Objects

The formal object of geography is the perspective and mindset of a phenomenon that exists on the surface of the earth, both physical, non-physical and social in nature from a spatial (special) point of view. The formal object in geography is a spatial perspective that is spaced out in geographical concepts. In studying and understanding the benefits of geographic study objects on the topic of open-earth phenomena.

Based on the perspective of formal objects, 6 main questions emerge as a characteristic of geography known as 5W + 1H as follows What (what phenomenon happened?), Where (where did this phenomenon occur?, When (when did this phenomenon occur?), Why : why did this phenomenon occur? and Who : who was involved in the phenomenon?. Not forgetting how or how to deal with this phenomenon?

Formal geographic studies always analyze the location, distribution on the earth’s surface which have interrelationships and interactions between a phenomenon and other phenomena. For example in research conducted on poverty issues, there are several things that can be studied in this regard, including:

• Where is the location of poverty? is it urban or rural? Is it an industrial, mining or agricultural area? Does it happen in developing countries or developed countries?
• What is the distribution pattern? Is it spread all over the area or only certain areas?
• What are the relations or criteria between the problem of poverty and other natural and social aspects in the region? For example, such as the availability of natural resources, the quality of the population such as the level of education, mastery of science and technology, the level of health and the customs that exist in the region.

Formal objects as outlined in geographic concepts can be seen from various points of view, such as:

• Spatial or regional point of view Through a spatial point of view, formal objects will become easier to review in terms of the value of a place from various interests. Starting from here, we can learn about location, distance and affordability or accessibility.
• From an environmental or ecological point of view, an ecological point of view can be carried out by knowing the interactions between organisms and the surrounding environment. An example of the relationship between farmers and fishermen is the relationship between farmers and fields and rice fields.
• The regional point of view is a combination of analysis from a spatial and ecological point of view. Analysis carried out from this point of view can be done by knowing the differences that exist in one region to another.
• The point of view of time, formal objects that can be studied from time to time, so that the benefits can be used and know the extent of its development. For example, measuring the area of ​​an island over time.

 

Rhoad Murpey in his work entitled The Scope of Geography has argued that there are three points that become the scope of geography, namely:

• The existence of the distribution and connection of the population on earth with a number of spatial aspects and how humans can make use of them.
• The relationship of interaction between humans and the state of the physical environment, which is one part of regional diversity. Regional framework and analysis of specific regions.

Geographical Aspects

Aspects of geography is an interpretation and ideas as well as things that are considered in the study of geography. The aspects of the study of this science are divided into two, namely physical aspects and social aspects.

1. Physical Aspect

The physical aspect is a geographical aspect that concerns the state of the natural environment outside of humans. For example, the shape of the earth’s surface, waters, air conditions, plants and animals, as well as all natural phenomena that can be directly observed. This physical aspect is subdivided into topological aspects (territory), biotic aspects (humans, vegetation, and animals), and non-biotic aspects (soil, waters, and climate).

The physical aspect of geography focuses on the study of geosphere phenomena that affect human life. In general, the physical aspects of geography deal with phenomena that are directly influenced by nature, not by humans themselves. Basically, the physical aspects of geography can be broadly categorized into three categories, namely science that deals with the shape of the Earth and its measurements.

Apart from that, it also studies biotic elements (flora and fauna as well as living things), abiotic elements (weather, soil, rocks and minerals). If we break down deeper, these three broad categories can be consolidated into several separate areas of study and science. The following are some examples of the scope of geographic studies that are included in the physical aspects of geography. The following are three physical aspects of geography that can be studied or observed:

• Topological Aspect
  This aspect discusses matters relating to the location or location of an area, the shape of the earth’s surface, the area and boundaries of areas that have certain characteristics.
• Biotic Aspect
  This aspect discusses matters relating to vegetation elements such as (plants or flora, animal or fauna) and population studies.
• Non-Biotic Aspects
  This aspect discusses matters relating to the elements of soil conditions, water systems (hydrology) whether waters, land or sea and climatic conditions of an area.

2. Social Aspect

The social aspect is the geographical aspect in the form of all social, cultural and economic problems that occur because of human activities and creativity on the surface of the earth. Some of the things studied in the social aspect include economic, social, political, and cultural aspects. There are other aspects besides the physical aspect, the study of geography also includes social aspects. Geography studies the humans who live in it from their relation to the phenomena that occur in the geosphere.

Social aspects also include political, anthropological, economic aspects, and aspects related to culture or human life patterns. In this aspect, humans are seen as the main focus of geographic studies by paying attention to the pattern of human distribution in space and the relationship between human behavior and the environment. There are several social aspects studied, namely:

• Social Aspect
  This aspect discusses matters relating to elements of customs, traditions, communities, community groups and social institutions.
• Economic Aspect
  This aspect discusses matters relating to the elements of agriculture, mining, plantations, fisheries, trade, industry, transportation and markets.
• Cultural Aspects
  This aspect discusses matters relating to elements of religion, education, art and language.
• Political Aspect
  This aspect discusses matters relating to elements of governance that occur in life in society.

We hope that this article on “Understanding Aspects of Geography & Objects of Geographical Studies” will help you to understand the object of geography in more depth.

Book Recommendations About Geography

As #FriendsWithoutLimits, sinaumedia will always provide quality books such as the following books:

1. Thematic and Visual Edition of Geography Dictionary by Drs. Gatot Harmanto, M.Pd. and Rudi Hartono, S.Pd.

2. Geography Smart Card by Kak Nat

3. Sharp Geography by Rino Agustianto, S.Pd

Thus the article about the Definition of Geography, Aspects, & Objects of Study of Geography. I hope this helps.

Source: from various sources

Recommended Books & Articles Related to Geography

Definition of General Administration –  Does Sinaumed’s know what administration is? Yep, administration is one activity that will definitely always exist in an organization. Even educational institutions in the form of schools also have an administrative system that is different from other schools.

However, this time we will not discuss school administration, but general administration. Actually, what is general administration? What is the role of this general administration for the survival of an organization?

So, so that Sinaumed’s can understand it, let’s look at the following review!

Definition of Administration

Administration is a form of business and activity related to setting policies in order to achieve organizational targets and goals. In this case, administration can be distinguished into two meanings conveyed by experts.

Administration in the Narrow Meaning

According to Handayaningrat, administration in a narrow sense comes from the word administratie, which includes the activities of taking notes, correspondence, light bookkeeping, typing, agendas, and so on which are administrative techniques. Meanwhile, according to Atmosudirjo, administration can be viewed from a narrow scope of work, which only revolves around office work such as writing, typing correspondence, agendas, filing, and bookkeeping.

Based on some of these opinions, it can be concluded that the narrow sense of administration is a form of activity with office administration which includes writing and other paper work.

Administration in a Broad Meaning

According to The Liang Gie, broadly administration is a series of activities carried out by a group of people in a work to achieve certain goals. Meanwhile, according to Siagian, administration is a process of cooperation between two or more people based on certain rationalities in order to achieve predetermined goals.

Thus, administration broadly can be interpreted as a process of cooperation between two or more people who have the goal of achieving targets by utilizing facilities and infrastructure in an efficient and effective manner.

An organization or company can stand and develop because of the support of resources and good management. Administration is part of the management of a company or organization which includes data collection and arrangement of matters relating to various aspects of the company or organization so that they can be optimized properly.

In everyday life, administration has many functions, both in the world of work and education. The existence of administration can help facilitate work that is both formal and non-formal. In managing data, administration makes management easier and more precise.

So we can conclude, administration has an important and crucial role in the series of organizational or company activities.

Important Matters from Understanding Administration

According to experts, there are several administrative notions that we need to know so that they can be put into practice and help smooth activities in organizations or companies.

According to George R. Terry, administration is an activity of planning, controlling and organizing office work and activating those who carry it out in order to achieve the goals that have been set. Meanwhile, Arthur Grager stated that administration is the administrative function of communication and letter services in an organization.

Not much different, Sondang P. Siagian interprets administration as any form of cooperation process between two or more individuals on the basis of selected rationality to achieve predetermined goals.

Ulbert Silalahi also stated that administration is the systematic preparation and recording of data/information both internally and externally as an effort to provide information and make it easier to retrieve it either in part or in whole.

William Leffingwell and Edwin Robinson explained that administration is a part of management science that is related to the efficient implementation of office work, when and where the work must be done.

Based on these various definitions of administration, we can draw 3 important things that can be used to help work processes in organizations or companies.

1. Administration is an art as well as a conditional and situational process. Because, this will be related to the situation, time, condition, and place.
2. There are certain elements, among which there are two or more people in it, there is cooperation between people that has a formal and hierarchical nature, there are tasks, have goals, and the availability of facilities and infrastructure.
3. Administration will appear simultaneously with the emergence of human civilization, where administration has the goal of achieving the final result together.

Administrative Elements that Must Be Fulfilled

According to The Liang Gie, there are 8 elements that must be fulfilled in administration in order to create a positive function and impact on organizations and companies.

1. Organization

Organization is a place where administrative activities are carried out. The people will gather into a vessel for the workers.

2. Management

Management is the main tool for carrying out administrative implementation. In this implementation there are several parts such as regulators, movers, managers, and operational personnel. Management is also divided into three groups, namely top management , and lower management .

3. Communication

Administration also regulates communication between departments with one another in an organization. For example by letter or newsletter. This is very important because it is to find out and clarify information circulating so that there is good communication between management, clients, and the administration itself.

4. Staffing

Staffing relates to the use of labor. The interrelated processes are acceptance, placement, utilization, and termination of work.

5. Finance

This relates to the financing of cooperation contracts, starting from how to obtain funds to their accountability. For example, administration of sales, purchases, contracts or leases, as well as sources of funds.

6. Supplies

There is a relationship related to the procurement of goods, deviations, and exclusions. The administration will sort out which items are needed for work activities.

7. Administration

Within the administration, there are activities that include recording, storing, and sending documents or data. This element is very important in administration because it is a source of information for organizations to make decisions.

8. Public Relations

Public relations or what is commonly called public relations is an effort to establish good relations with consumers and clients. The administration will create rules on how to relate to the public, especially to consumers.

Features of General Administration

Administration has several characteristics or characteristics that we can see as follows.

• Administration has clear objectives.
• There are human groups in administration consisting of two or more people.
• Administration is always associated with cooperative activities.
• There is a business or work process in administration.
• The existence of a leader, mentor and supervisor in carrying out activities in the administration.

General Administration Functions

There are several administrative functions in general that we must pay attention to so that they can be implemented properly.

1. Planning / planning

Planning is an activity that requires an administrative activity, starting from data collection, data processing, to the planning process.

2. Organizing / preparation

Preparation is an activity of compiling and building work communication between members within the organization, so that it will achieve a business unitary for the goals of the organization.

3. Coordinating / coordinating

Coordination is a management function that carries out a number of activities or activities so that they run well, so that there is no chaos, activity vacancies, or clashes that are carried out by connecting, adjusting, and unifying the work of subordinates who work together in a planned manner in an effort to achieve a certain goal. organization goals.

4. Reporting / reports

A report is an activity or activity in the form of conveying the progress or results of an activity by making and providing reports on tasks and functions to higher officials, both in writing and orally to get an overview of the implementation of the tasks of members of the organization.

5. Budgeting / budget preparation

Budgeting is an activity of planning and managing finances and budgeting within an organization that is carried out on an ongoing basis.

6. Staffing / placement

Placement is an activity related to human resources and other resources within an organization, starting from the recruitment of workers, development, and equipment within the organization.

7. Directing / direction

Guidance or direction is an activity of interacting with members of the organization in the form of providing support, guidance, suggestions, orders so that tasks are carried out properly to achieve predetermined goals.

General Administration Purposes

Based on the various definitions, elements, characteristics, and functions that we already know, we can also know some of the goals of general administration as follows.

1. To compile a business program

Every organization needs information and data as a guide in preparing a superior work program. Information and data can be obtained through administrative activities. So administration must be carried out systematically so that the information and data needed can be found easily.

2. Evaluate organizational activities

With a good administrative system, it can help organizations to see various existing information and data. Through this information and data, organizations can evaluate each activity carried out.

3. Monitor administrative activities

Because administrative activities cover many things, their implementation must be carried out regularly and systematically. An organization can monitor how, when, what, where and why an activity is carried out if it has good administration.

4. Ensuring the security of business activities

Every organization or company requires security certainty in carrying out its business activities. Therefore, every organization needs good administration to monitor every activity, both from within and from outside the organization.

In addition to what has been mentioned above, administrative objectives can also be divided into 2, namely administration with long-term goals and administration with short-term goals.

Long-term goals with administrative patterns are aimed at achieving targets in an organization on a long-term basis, so that they are not made by just anyone in the organization but by the owners of the organization. The purpose of this administration is ideal, general, and unlimited qualifications.

For smaller short-term goals, usually made by a divisional part of the organization for divisional scope policies. This objective is specific, has a small scope, and has limited qualifications.

Examples of Administrative Activities

There are several examples of administrative forms based on their types that we need to know.

1. Population administration such as making Family Cards, ID Cards, Birth Certificates, Death Certificates, and others.
2. Population administration such as making class schedules, managing correspondence, and managing school activities.
3. Office administration such as taking care of employee attendance, making incoming and outgoing letters of goods, recording stock of goods, and others.
4. Financial administration such as making financial accounting records, making invoices, making financial reports, and others.
5. State administration such as the existence of rules for the formation of bodies and commissions in government, rules and procedures for public services, as well as presidential activities governing cabinet reshuffles .

General Administration Role

The role of administration can be said to be the Queen of Peace . Just imagine, surely commotion will continue to occur within an organization or company when the administration is not running properly. Administrators will later become liaisons in various departments, company partners, and consumers.

Thus, we can conclude that general administration has several roles, as follows.

1. Support the implementation of the main tasks to achieve organizational goals.
2. Provide information for officials or organizational leaders for decision making.
3. Helping the smooth development of the organization as a whole because it is involved in handling documents which are sources of information.

Therefore, there are several fields that can handle specific matters, such as understanding the meaning of administration, improving the performance of office staff in terms of organizing and managing office administration in various fields. There is also someone in charge of issuing proper filing standards, developing and managing company assets, developing administrative procedures, controlling and planning administrative budgets, and making reports on company activities ranging from payroll to other shipping activities.

Although the main duties of administrators depend on the company, they will act as a bridge between management and employees.

The Principles of Organizing Public Administration

Before carrying out an activity, there are several principles of general administration that can be considered, as follows:

1. The principle of responsibility

All public administration administrators must indicate who is in charge.

2. The principle of security

All writings of organizations or companies have a certain level of security.

3. The principle of communication channels

Implementation of general administration should follow the administrative channels that have been determined, so that all processes can be completed quickly, pay attention to supervision, and control of results that can be accounted for.

4. The principle of accuracy

This principle is to support all activities and smooth administration quickly and on time.

Scope of General Administration

According to The Liang Gie, the scope of administration consists of information or information about a matter or event that is obtained mainly through reading or observation, such as collecting or searching and collecting detailed information or information with the aim that it can be used later if needed.

General administration is also in the scope of note-taking or typing. This is a follow-up activity of collecting data so that it can be stored, read, or sent. Furthermore, general administration is also related to the activity of managing or analyzing a form of existing administrative data to obtain results from the data collected.

General administration is also in charge of storing and securing documents or data in various ways, so that later they can be reused if needed. Finally, general administration is within the scope of activities to send or share files or data to other parties from within the organization or outside the organization.

How General Administration Works

The way the administration works will be closely related to the tasks of the administrative staff in a company. In general, the way administration works is as follows:

1. Coordinate with secretaries or administrative staff from other divisions when there are joint meetings or other activities.
2. Compile and collect documents.
3. Prepare accommodation and tickets for work visit activities outside the office.
4. Ensure supply of office stationery.
5. Prepare and organize agendas for meetings and other office events.
6. Opening, managing, and distributing incoming correspondence to the company either in the form of letters or e-mails.
7. Prepare bills, reports, notes, letters, and other documents using data processing applications, databases, presentations, or worksheets.

In a company or organization, administration does not only have a function in correspondence. However, it has many functions ranging from planning, compiling, coordinating, making reports and compiling budgets to providing direction or guidance to members of the company or organization to achieve the goals that have been set.

So every company or organization should have good administration, including competent administration staff. Through proper management and administrative arrangements, it will make the company’s goals achieved easily. In addition, the company or organization will continue to exist and continue to experience development in tandem with the progress of the times and increasingly fierce competition.

It turns out that there are many roles and benefits of general administration that have been running in organizations or companies. If implemented properly, general administration can improve personal as well as team performance within an organization or company. If sinaumedia still needs references to understand general administration, you can visit sinaumedia’s collection of books at https://sinaumedia.com . As #FriendsWithoutLimits, sinaumedia will always provide the latest and best information.

Equity is – For shareholders in a company, equity is a familiar term. How not, this term is one of the consideration factors that is often used by someone when they want to invest in a company.

To find out more about equity or equity, then you can see this article. In this article, we will explain about equity, starting from its definition, types, elements, and how it works. So, read this article to the end, Sinaumed’s.

Pengertian Equity

Equity is the amount of rights or interests of the owner or an entity in the assets of a company. If you then remember the accounting equation, it is known that the left side is used as a marker of assets while the right side is debt and equity.

The left side shows the amount of resources owned by each company, while the right side shows the interest of creditors and owners of a company’s assets.

The term equity itself comes from the word equity which means the company’s net worth. So, in principle equity is net worth obtained from the funding of a company owner and from the results of a managed business activity.

According to the Statement of Financial Accounting Standards (PSAK) of 2002 Article 49, the notion of equity is the residual right to the company’s assets after deducting all liabilities. Equity = Assets (Assets) – Liabilities (Debt).

Equity or equity is also a formulation of total assets minus total liabilities. Equity itself is part of the owner’s rights in a company, namely the difference between existing assets and liabilities. However, equity cannot be sold and also has no measure of the sale value of a company. In addition, equity itself comes from funding from owners and the results of the company’s operations.

Equity will also then be reduced by the withdrawal of participation by the owner, sharing of benefits due to losses. In simple terms, equity is an estimate that reflects the magnitude of the rights and interests of company owners in company assets.

Now, after knowing the brief definition of equity, the next discussion will be the type of equity.

Jenis Equity

According to the Corporate Finance Institute , there are two types of equity that are most commonly used, namely book value and market value. How to calculate both are also different. For book value equity, the way to calculate it is to reduce assets with expenses or liabilities (related to existing accounts payable), you can also increase capital with saved income.

Meanwhile, the market value itself can then be calculated by adding the share price to the number of existing shares.

However, there are several other types of equity. which are not only related to shareholders and companies invested. The following are several types of equity and their explanations.

1. Home Equity

Home equity is the value of the home minus the amount owed on the mortgage. Well, this mortgage itself is a statement of debt on credit given to buy a house. For example, if you want to buy a house with a bank loan.

So, if the amount of money borrowed exceeds the selling price of the house, then the equity value of the house becomes negative. However, if what happens is the opposite, it means positive. This in itself is very important to consider, so you can get a good profit when selling or buying it.

2. Business Owner’s Equity

When opening a business, someone must have initial capital. Equity this one is a value of the capital. Capital that does not enter into any calculations and all kinds of profits that go from there will go to the business owner himself.

3. Shareholder Equity

Furthermore, shareholder equity is practically the same as that of business owners. In this case, the difference is in the value of the dividend which is then owned by the business owner and will be shared with the shareholders. This can happen because this dividend is a result of investment from the capital that was issued at the beginning.

4. Equity Financing

Finally, there is equity financing. This type of equity will then be created when the company is successful in running a business, but does not make a profit. Well, shares or ownership in the business will then be sold to investors and the proceeds from the sale will be used to develop the company.

Elements of Equity in the Company

Equity itself consists of several elements. The following are the elements of equity along with their explanations.

1. Paid-up capital

One element that is often found in equity is paid-up capital. This term then refers to the amount of money invested by a company owner as a shareholder in the company.

This type of capital will then be further divided into two parts, namely share capital, or the number of applicable share values. Then, agio or share disagio, namely the difference in the value of the deposit from the shareholder with the total value of the shares. If this difference then has a positive value, then it is also called agio. If this difference is negative, it is called a disagio.

2. Unshared Profits

The next element in the company’s equity is profits that cannot be shared. This element is also known as retained earnings. It is also the result of net operating profit that is not taken by a shareholder.

The decision to share or withhold these profits will then be taken by the company owners. For example, in a publicly listed company, the decision to distribute or save profits is then made through a GMS or at a General Meeting of Shareholders.

3. Capital from Revaluation

Furthermore, according to Chron’s website, the element contained in the company’s equity is capital from revaluation. In practice, each company will then apply a recalculation process to the value of all the assets they own. If later during this recalculation process there is an adjustment to the value of assets, then the difference will change the company’s balance sheet. This is what then becomes the initial capital of a reassessment.

For example, a company that has assets in the form of a plot of land. Then, when there is a reassessment process, the price of this land will increase. So, this difference in value will then be formed because of this price increase which will become the capital of the revaluation.

4. Capital from Donations

The last form of element contained in the company’s equity is the capital obtained from donations or grants. All forms of adding to the value of assets after these liabilities or obligations will then be realized as equity values. This also includes when the company obtains capital from donations. Grant capital or self-donation is an additional capital that applies when the company experiences additional assets without making any expenditures.

Steps to Calculate Equity

Now you need to understand how to calculate this equity. As you know from the discussion above that the type of equity can be everywhere, depending on who uses it. However, now equity calculations are very easy to do because they usually use the same formula, namely:

Equity = Assets – Debt.

Whether it’s equity in the purchase of shares by shareholders, equity in the initial capital of a business actor, equity which is then obtained by a company from shares sold in the public, and so on, it must use a formula above. Assets are the capital that you have, then reduced by the debts that you do to support your business activities.

For example, when a company gets capital from buying shares worth IDR 100 billion. To find out how much the equity value is, this capital will be reduced by the company’s debt of IDR 7 billion.

Equity = Assets – Debt Equity
100 billion – 7 billion Equity = 93 billion

So, the company’s equity value from the sale of its shares is IDR 93 billion.

How it Works Equity

However, equity is then used for various things. Indeed, the end will end with the conclusion that equity is the sum of inventory, assets, and net income. Quoted from The Balance Small Business , below is how equity works in various forms:

1. Shares

Investors generally then own equity in a company in the form of shares (either in common or preferred stock). Equity ownership in a company also means that business owners will share ownership with investors, commonly referred to as shareholders. If someone has shares in a company that has not gone public, then the name of the equity owned then becomes private equity.

2. Balance sheet

In the balance sheet, the way to see total equity is by looking at the number of ordinary shares, preferred shares, paid-up capital and retained earnings. This equity is also referred to as shareholders’ equity, then it will describe the amount of equity owned by business owners.

3. Liquidation

If your business is going bankrupt and has to liquidate, then the business owner’s equity is the amount of money left after paying off debts and selling all assets owned. If a financial situation is in a bad state, it could be that after it is disbursed, there will be no equity left.

4. Intangible equity

When calculating equity, the assets that are included in the calculation are tangible or intangible assets. Tangible assets include inventory of owned facilities and property. On the other hand, examples of intangible assets are the reputation of the company, its brand identity and intellectual property rights. Even though it is not visible, these assets will then greatly affect the value of a company.

From all the discussion above, it can be said that equity is an accounting calculation that cannot be released when you want to make an investment. This is the discussion on equity or equity, starting from its meaning to how it works. Hopefully all the discussion above can be useful as well as add to your insight.

Recommended Books Related to Equity

1. Accounting for Assets, Liabilities & Equity

This book as a whole will review the accounting for assets, liabilities and equity items. The topics that will be discussed in detail and depth are accounting for cash, receivables, inventories (including cost of goods sold), investments in debt securities and equity securities, fixed assets (investments in non-current operating assets), current liabilities, bonds payable (financing long-term debt), and corporate accounting (shareholders’ equity).

This book is very appropriate to read (own) as reference material for the general public, practitioners, as well as students in accounting and management study programs who are taking introductory intermediate accounting and financial accounting courses. This book can be used as a practice reference for accounting executives who are involved in the financial reporting process or other general public who are interested in learning or getting to know accounting.

2. Young Billionaire Shares

Are you looking for a step-by-step guide to becoming a successful full time investor? Have you been in the capital market for a long time but haven’t been able to generate consistent profits? How do you build passive income from investing in stocks? Is it possible to achieve financial freedom by investing in stocks? Why does stock trading actually make you lose money?

This book will answer all the above questions and provide proven solutions. It will also show why young people have great opportunities and resources to achieve financial success by leveraging the stock market.

3. Cost Accounting Accountant

Book by Drs. Harnanto, M. Soc. Sc., Is a textbook that is simple, concise, yet fully discloses the collection of production cost data and the determination of the cost of products based on the historical cost system; which is absolutely necessary to be used as a basis for evaluating inventory of products in process and finished products in accordance with standards or Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (PABU) at manufacturing company lines.

This book is written using jargon and a straightforward style, so that ordinary people can easily understand its contents. This book explains everything related to measurement, systems and procedures for collecting and recording production cost data and determining or calculating the cost of products based on a historical cost system. The discussion in this book covers the collection of data on material costs, labor costs, and factory overhead costs; both according to the cost of orders method and the cost of processes in the historical cost system, including the various issues that surround it such as: damaged products, defective products and leftover materials.

This book also provides realistic case examples that are easy to understand. With content or discussion material that is quite comprehensive, it is no doubt that this book is very useful for practitioners (public accountants, management accountants, production managers, financial managers), and students of diploma programs, undergraduate programs taking accounting courses in particular .

4. Accurate Costing with Microsoft Excel

Are you confused about how to calculate the cost of goods sold? Starting from allocating the costs one by one and then putting them into cost items. It’s really hard huh? Now you don’t have to worry anymore! This book will answer all your questions starting from: What is cost, Easy cost allocation with excel, Calculation of depreciation and allocation to cost of goods sold.

Integrating all costs into cost of goods sold You will also get information about real costing calculations that can be applied immediately. Everything is done with the help of Microsoft Excel which makes your work easier and can produce accurate, fast and precise costing.

If you want to find books on accounting, then you can get them at sinaumedia.com . To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

 

Definition of Entrepreneurship – Currently, the government is campaigning for an invitation to start a profession as an entrepreneur. Besides being able to boost the country’s economy, being an entrepreneur can also play a major role in reducing unemployment in Indonesia.

Many people understand that the concept of entrepreneurship is an attempt to start their own business. That’s true, but not everyone can become a successful entrepreneur just like that. There are many things that must be understood about entrepreneurship, especially for Sinaumed’s who wants to start his own business, whether in the culinary, animal husbandry, or commercial shop sector.

So, what is the meaning of entrepreneurship? What are the processes that must be passed for entrepreneurship? What are the factors that cause failure that entrepreneurs must avoid? So, so that Sinaumed’s understands these things, let’s immediately see the following review!

Overall Entrepreneurial Definition

Definition of Entrepreneur According to Experts

In fact, the concept of entrepreneurship has emerged since the 17th century and its meaning has also evolved with the times. Both entrepreneurship and entrepreneurship have almost the same concept. If entrepreneurship is a process of running a mature business, then entrepreneurship is the process of establishing and developing a business so that it can be run in a mature manner.

The definition of entrepreneurship will basically develop according to each person’s perspective on how the actions of an entrepreneur are. Well, here are some definitions of entrepreneurship from several experts.

Suryana (2006)

Entrepreneur is someone who has creative and innovative capabilities to be used as a basis, tips, and resources in an effort to find opportunities for success.

Zimmerer (2008)

Entrepreneur is someone who is able to create a new business by daring to take risks and uncertainties in order to achieve profits. The method used must be related to efforts to identify significant opportunities and combine the necessary resources so that they can be capitalized.

Joseph Schumpeter

“…entrepreneur as the person who destroys the existing economic order by introducing new products and services, by creating new forms of organization, or by exploiting new raw materials.” (A person who is able to break down the existing economic system by introducing new goods and services, and creating organizational forms while processing new raw materials)

Meredith (2011)

Entrepreneurs are people who have the ability to see and assess business opportunities by gathering the necessary resources and taking appropriate actions for profit.

Steinhoff and Burgess

Entrepreneurs are people who are able to organize, manage, and dare to take risks to create new businesses and opportunities in business ventures (in Suryana and Bayu, 2011)

Well, based on several definitions of entrepreneurship that have been put forward by these experts it can be concluded that,

“Entrepreneurs are individuals or groups of individuals who have creative, innovative abilities and full courage to take risks to open new business opportunities in order to achieve profits.”

So, who is an entrepreneur?

Generally, an entrepreneur is an actor or someone who runs his entrepreneurial business for profit. According to Schumpeter (1934), describes that entrepreneur is someone who successfully implements new combinations with the ability to see as well as evaluate existing business opportunities. In this case, an entrepreneur can certainly obtain the resources that are needed and take appropriate action to achieve success.

14 Characteristics of an Entrepreneur

An entrepreneur, aka someone who runs an entrepreneur, will always have innovative ideas in his efforts to develop his business.

If the business is not developed, it is not surprising that it will be competed by other entrepreneurs who are more dynamic in adapting to the times. So, here are some characteristics that are so attached to an entrepreneur.

1. Desire For Responsibility

An excellent entrepreneur will definitely feel personally responsible for everything he does, especially when it comes to his business opportunity. Yep, they will be more able to control resources to achieve profits.

2. Tolerance For Ambiguity

Given that humans are social creatures, so does an entrepreneur who will definitely relate to other people, be it employees, customers, suppliers of materials, suppliers of goods, distributors, the community, and formal legal regulations. For this reason, a good entrepreneur must be able to maintain good relations with parties related to his business.

3.Vision _

Basically, every human being has ideals, as well as an entrepreneur who must have clear goals and objectives for future business steps.

Vision , aka this vision, becomes the philosophy, ideals, and motivation for why the company or business must survive. Then, an entrepreneur will translate that vision into clear goals, policies, budgets, and work procedures.

4. Tolerance For Failure

Everyone in this world will always fail, including entrepreneurs. No matter how innovative creativity is, it is not uncommon to fail and that is normal.

To achieve success, you have to go through a long process and even along the way you can develop your personality to be tolerant of business failures.

5. Internal Focus of Control

A superior entrepreneur will definitely have more ability to control himself and focus on internal things.

6. Continuous Improvement

In line with the characteristics of Tolerance For Failure , a superior entrepreneur is certain that when he fails, he will not just stop, but will take it as experience and make continuous improvements.

7. Preference For Moderate Risk

Almost the same as the characteristics of Tolerance For Failure , a superior entrepreneur will always be faced with risk intensity. There are 3 kinds of traits possessed by an entrepreneur when facing risks, namely 1) Those who really like high risks; 2) Those who like to take moderate risks; and 3) Avoiding risks.

8. Confidence In Their Ability To Success

In this case, an entrepreneur will be considered successful if he has high confidence to succeed in his own abilities.

9. Desire For Immediate Feedback

A successful entrepreneur will always be happy to get a response or feedback from other people, especially when experiencing a problem. Feedback, responses, and criticism should still be used as a guide going forward because it’s all delivered from another person’s point of view.

10.High Energy Level

A successful entrepreneur will always have a higher spirit than most people. Even when facing risks, he is also enthusiastic because he believes all his business endeavors will achieve success.

11. Future Orientation

A successful entrepreneur will always be able to see business opportunities and be oriented towards the future.

12. Skill At Organizing

It should be understood that to build a business, definitely requires the ability to organize existing resources, both tangible and intangible.

13. High Commitment

When you want to develop a new business opportunity, of course, it must be accompanied by high full commitment in order to be successful. Discipline is key in this characteristic.

14. Flexibility

Does Sinaumed’s realize that everything in this world is changing so fast? So, from the point of view of an entrepreneur, this should be used as a guideline that he must also be able to adapt to changes, especially in his business.

6 Indicators of Personality Traits of an Entrepreneur

Reporting from Module 1: Entrepreneurial Concepts and Processes , according to Meredith et al (1996, argues that there are at least 6 indicators of personality traits that an entrepreneur must possess so that his business has the opportunity to succeed.

No.	Personality Traits Indicator	Form of Character
1.	Self-confident	Sure it will work. Don’t rely too much on the help of others. Optimistic. Individualism (but still as a social being).
2.	Task and Results Oriented	Need for achievement. Profit oriented. Perseverance and steadfastness. Hard work determination. Have a strong drive, energetic, and initiative.
3.	Risk Taker	The ability to take any risks. Loves challenges.
4.	Leadership	Behave as a good leader. Can get along with other people. Responding to suggestions and criticism.
5.	Originality	Innovative and creative. Flexible. Have many sources. Multi talented. Knowing many things.
6.	Future Oriented	The view is always to the future. perspective

8 Stages of Entrepreneurship Process in General

Reporting from Module 1: Entrepreneurial Concepts and Processes , there are several stages of the process when setting up a business, namely:

1. There is an idea to do a business venture

Actually, the opportunity and the idea to do a business venture is not easy and not everyone has it. Some people have to fight for these business opportunities and ideas, some people can easily acquire and then develop them. There are several conditions that allow these opportunities and ideas to arise in the minds of individuals, namely:

1. There are changes in the surrounding environment.
2. Foresight of an entrepreneur to see business opportunities.
3. There is an urgent situation.
4. Because of a hobby.

2. There are Constraints

All entrepreneurial processes that are in the stage of establishing their business will definitely face obstacles, including:

1. The idea that is owned turns out to be unworkable or not practical enough.
2. Still tied to the previous company (especially employees who want to switch careers to become entrepreneurs)
3. Not having the will to stand alone.
4. Lack of knowledge of the market.
5. Lack of technical ability.
6. There are certain government regulations.
7. Viewed as having a low social status.

3. Develop a Business Plan

Today, all business activities cannot only rely on feelings or even reckless capital, you know… but must also be accompanied by careful business planning. Through this business plan, it is alleged that it will reduce the risk of failure to bankruptcy which is likely to arise in the business venture.

This business plan includes production planning, capital planning, resource planning, and marketing planning. All of these elements must be managed properly so that it can run as expected.

4. Get Help From the Environment

As previously explained that entrepreneurs are also human beings who are social beings. Thus will always need the help of others. Yep, the shortcomings that exist in us need to be covered with the advantages of others. There are several opportunities from the surrounding environment that can be utilized in this entrepreneurial process, namely:

1. Market contact.
2. Work partners.
3. Capable workforce (employees).
4. Technical education and support.
5. Help from suppliers.
6. Credit assistance.
7. Business advisor.
8. Successful role models.

5. Preparing a Strategy to Enter the Market

Strategy is of course very much needed, especially for a novice entrepreneur regarding how to carry out his business activities. Even the question of “is it better to buy an existing company or carry out franchising activities” is also a strategy.

6. Determine the form of business organization

The next stage in carrying out an entrepreneurial activity is to determine the form of business organization, which can be in the form of:

1. Company
2. Individual business
3. Firm or Partnership

The determination of the form of the organization must look at several indicators. Starting from the goals to be achieved, access to capital, mastery of production science and technology, quality of human resources owned, business scale, network and marketing capabilities.

7. Identifying Factors Influencing Business Success

In the process, there are several factors that are claimed to be influential factors in supporting the success of a business venture, namely:

1. Sufficient capital.
2. Using the latest equipment and methods, aka flexible.
3. Stay guided by the business plan.
4. Understand knowledge of business.
5. Want to work hard.
6. Have the ability to maintain good relations with many related parties.

8. Continue to Maintain the Entrepreneurial Spirit

What is no less important is the entrepreneurial spirit that every entrepreneur must have. Through this spirit, a tenacious and unyielding spirit will develop when facing various problems and dynamics when running a business.

Factors Causing Failure

In general, the success and failure of the entrepreneur is determined more by the ability of the individual entrepreneur himself. Zimmerer (1996) also stated that many entrepreneurs fail because of the following things.

1. Incompetent in managerial terms. This is evidenced by the low ability and performance in managing the business.
2. Lack of ability and experience. Starting from technical skills, ability to visualize business, ability to coordinate, skills in managing human resources, to the ability to synergize company operations.
3. Inability to control finances. In a business, finance plays an important role so that liquidity must also be maintained properly.
4. There was a failure in the business plan. Remember that business planning is the starting point of all entrepreneurial activities. If the plan fails, it will have a major impact on future business operations.
5. The location or place of business is less strategic. Choosing the wrong place of business can also be fatal, you know in an effort to grow a business.
6. Lack of supervision on equipment. Supervision will always be closely related to the efficiency and effectiveness of business operations.
7. Lack of seriousness. If when implementing entrepreneurship and do not have some personality indicators as previously described, of course it will hamper the running of business ventures.
8. Inability in the entrepreneurial transition. In this case, with regard to an entrepreneur, he must dynamically keep up with the times, if he does not want his business to go bankrupt. Business success can only be obtained if entrepreneurs have the courage to make changes and are adaptive to changing times.

Source:

Musyadar, Achmad, and Iwang Gumilar. Module 1: Entrepreneurship. 

https://repository.uksw.edu/bitstream/123456789/19513/2/T1_522013021_BAB%20II.pdf

https://dewey.petra.ac.id/repository/jiunkpe/jiunkpe/s1/mbis/2013/jiunkpe-is-s1-2013-31410189-31036-informal-chapter2.pdf

Discus Throwing – For those of you who like sports activities or all kinds of things, you will definitely be familiar with this one sport. Guess which sport is it ? Yep, athletics.

As you know, the number of sports in athletics itself is known to be very numerous and varied. Well, one of them is the discus throwing sports number.

Are there any of you here who are unfamiliar with this sports number? No, for sure, discus throwing itself is very familiar to the ears of the people of Indonesia, let alone the world. What’s more, discus throwing has often been included in international sports competitions, namely the Olympics.

So, in this article, we will invite you to get to know and find out what can be learned from one of the numbers or types of sports in this athletics branch. If you want to know more, watch this article until it’s finished!

Understanding

Do you already know the complete definition of discus throwing? Come on, what is the definition of discus throwing? If you don’t know it yet, don’t worry, first of all we will discuss the complete and clear definition of discus throwing itself along with the history, basic techniques, and rules of discus throwing.

In general, discus throwing is defined as one of the sports numbers or types of athletics which is carried out using tools in the form of wood with a plate-like shape equipped with an iron belt, or it can also be formed from other basic materials that have a flat and round shape to be thrown. Throwing discs in English is known as Discus Throw .

In language, discus throwing can be interpreted separately and in more detail. For the first word, namely the word throwing has the meaning or definition as a type of sport that is carried out by throwing, more or less like throwing bullets, javelins, hammers, and discs.

Then for the second word, namely the word disc itself is an object that becomes a tool for throwing discus sports. These discs have the shape of a plate surrounded by a frame made of iron belt material.

So, discus throwing is a sport in the form of throwing discs with a predetermined field. The winner of this sport is determined by who throws the disc the farthest, then he is the winner.

 

 

Understanding According to Experts

Is that all the understanding or definition of discus throwing? Oh of course not, other than the definition or understanding of discus throwing in general and language. It turns out that there is also an understanding or definition of discus throwing from experts in various fields who participate in expressing and voicing their opinions or views regarding the meaning or definition of discus throwing.

1. Mochtar

The definition of discus throwing according to Mochtar (2011: 124), explains that the notion of discus throwing itself is a type of sport that is carried out by throwing or throwing an object which is classified as an auxiliary tool. The object has a flat and round shape with a certain tool weight in accordance with the provisions.

The tool or auxiliary object is made of wood with edges made of iron or metal. In carrying out the throwing movement in the discus throwing sport, it is carried out using one hand from the side of the body in order to achieve the goal, namely to cover as far as the distance as determined by the rules.

2. Suherman

The definition of discus throwing according to Suherman (2001:19), explains that the notion of discus throwing is one of the sports numbers included in throwing sports in athletics. Discus throwing is a sport that uses throwing techniques that use rotation or rotation of the legs and body.

3. Adi

The definition of discus throwing according to Adi (2008: 73), explains that discus throwing is one of the number of competitions in athletics competitions. In this athletic competition, the athletes do it by throwing an object that has a round and flat shape called a disc with the distance as far as possible according to the rules and regulations that have been applied. In discus throwing each athlete is given 3 chances to throw. Discus throwing is a sport for both male and female athletes.

4. Javer

The definition of discus throwing according to Javer (2012: 91), explains that there are several general goals that will be achieved when carrying out discus throwing, namely the first goal is to throw the discus with maximum speed: this goal will be achieved if the discus thrower has a large body, so it is done by a thrower who is as big as possible. Next is the second goal, which aims to throw objects called discs using the best possible throwing point of view.

History and Development

After knowing all kinds of definitions or understandings of the discus throwing sport, it’s time for us to tell you about how history was formed and the inclusion of discus throwing as one of the sports numbers contested in the athletics Olympics.

We will present the history of discus throwing in two types, namely the history of world discus throwing and the second is the history of discus throwing in Indonesia.

1. History of Discus Throwing in the World

If you have read the history of athletics, then you will definitely be familiar with a book called Odyssey . Yes, this book seems to be a history book of athletics in the world. Now, for the history of the discus throwing sport number itself is in the book too.

As usual, the book mentions that athletic movements which include basic human movements have existed since prehistoric times. In fact, since the existence of humans on earth, these athletic movements have been known and mastered. These basic movements were used by prehistoric people to sustain their lives.

Humans in prehistoric times certainly depended heavily on their physical performance, obviously because humans at that time did not yet have qualified knowledge, like humans in modern times. If prehistoric humans did not have efficient bodies, such as having deficiencies in jumping and throwing agility, not good at running fast, not skilled at walking, and many more.

It’s not just like having flaws, but prehistoric humans would be very easy to get caught by wild animals or even worse, it would be difficult to save themselves from natural disasters that existed in prehistoric times. This is what made prehistoric humans pay great attention to their physical health. This also makes athletics the oldest sport in the world.

Although the athletic sports movement existed in prehistoric times, the Olympic athletics competition was first held after humans entered ancient times. For when exactly, it is not known, but what is certain is that it happened around 1000 years ago before entering the year AD. .

It is known that the facts in the book entitled Poet of Greece , written by Homer himself, tell about the adventurous journey of Odysseus who was stranded on an island indicated as the Phaeacia archipelago belonging to King Alcinous. In the book, Odysseus is told to face the King Alcinous, then, the King decides to hold a ceremony with the aim of welcoming Odysseus to the islands. So what is the content of the welcoming ceremony?

The content of the welcoming ceremony was a contest that all of King Alcinous’ subjects participated in. In that competition, all of Phaeacia’s youth showed all their skills in various competitions, such as wrestling competitions, boxing competitions, running competitions, to discus throwing competitions.

Afterwards, at the end of the event, the King asked Odysseus to demonstrate the movements of one of the sports being contested, namely discus throwing. At first Odysseus didn’t feel comfortable demonstrating this and refused the King very gently.

However, he finally complied with the request of the King. Odysseus immediately entered the arena, without even removing the armor he was wearing and took a disc.

With his perfect basic technique, Odysseus threw the disc and the disc slid far and then fell according to the distance achieved by the athletes in the Phaeacia islands.

Well, what conclusions can we draw? We can conclude that from ancient times the Greek population knew and competed in all kinds of sports in athletics. This can be proven by the existence of sports numbers, such as sports numbers for running, jumping, and discus throwing which are known and contested to date in every Olympics.

2. History of Discus Throwing in Indonesia

The history of discus throwing in the State of Indonesia itself is known to be very related and cannot even be separated from the story of the history of the athletics sport itself. Then how did the Indonesian State recognize athletics?

The Indonesian state itself knows and knows the existence of athletics in the world through the Netherlands. More precisely when the State of Indonesia was still in the Dutch colonial period.

Then around the beginning of 1942 to 1945, to be precise when the colonial period had passed into the hands of the Japanese State, the activities of this athletic sport had experienced a development which was considered quite significant.

This fact can be proven from the large number of students and employees who start implementing gymnastic activities. Not only that, there are facts where discus throwing is one of the materials studied for sports subjects.

As time went on, Indonesia became independent in 1945, to be precise, the discus throwing sport became very well known by many Indonesians and spread throughout the region. Many Indonesian citizens began to study this discus throwing athletics and became professionals.

 

 

Basic Techniques

 

After knowing the meaning and history, it’s time for you to know about the basic techniques of discus throwing. Then, what are the basic techniques in discus throwing?

1. Disc Holding Technique

Place the edge of the disc on the first indentation of your hand. Try to stretch your fingers a little with the same distance between the fingers on your hands. Please note, the longer your fingers, the easier it will be for you to hold the disc. Don’t forget to hold the disc firmly.

2. Posture When Throwing Discus

There are two ways that you can apply to your body posture when throwing discs. The two ways are to use a sideways style and use a backwards style. When you are about to make a throw, try to stand up straight sideways towards the throw by opening your legs wide.

The left foot is facing straight ahead according to the direction of the throw, while the right leg is behind right beside the left foot. Don’t forget to bend your knees slightly and point them to the right side. The right foot is used as a pedestal and lean to the right.

The right hand is used to carry the disc right beside the body with the arm straight and limp, for the left hand and the elbow is quite bent. Place your left hand and elbow in front of your relaxed body. It aims to maintain balance.

3. Advanced Attitude (Follow That)

For the third technique, this is similar to when doing shot put and javelin throwing. When the discus will be thrown from the hand, your right foot is rejected and the body is stepped up and forward. Then, end with the final attitude, namely after the disc is released, try to land on the right foot as quickly as possible.

For the left leg is lifted straight towards the back and released, accompanied by bending the body forward. All of this aims to keep your body balanced so you don’t fall forward, so you can still stand properly when the disc is released.

4. Steps to Take Prefix

For the implementation of taking the initial stance in discus throwing it is known to be the same as the prefix taken when taking the initial steps in shot put sports.

5. Final Step

The final step in discus throwing is a further movement that will be carried out by athletes to restore body stability and is useful for avoiding mistakes. This final step movement is carried out for the reason of braking, which is very useful for protecting and preventing athletes from violations and for athletes to stay in the circle.

This fifth movement is performed by changing legs very quickly after the disc is released from the hand. The right leg is bent and the left leg is swung backwards and floated with the aim of restoring body stability.

Ground Rules

Every sport that is contested or in the Olympics must have rules that have been determined in accordance with existing regulations, as well as various types of sports in athletics. One of them is discus throwing.

Discus throwing itself is known to have many existing regulations, but in this article we will only give as many as six points from the regulations that apply in discus throwing. Here are six rules that apply in discus throwing.

1. Requirements for Throwing Discs

An athlete or participant in a discus throwing competition is allowed to throw a discus, if the athlete is standing on the discus throwing track or arena. The discus throwing arena is a circle with a diameter of about 2.5 meters.

2. May not be exposed to soil that is outside the circle

An athlete or participant in a discus throwing competition is not allowed or is not permitted to touch or make physical contact with the ground that is outside the circle.

3. Can Only Touch the Upper Rim

An athlete or participant in a sports competition throws a discus to touch or make physical contact with the upper rim. An athlete or participant in a discus throwing competition is only allowed to touch or make physical contact with the inner rim.

4. Cannot Leave the Circle Before the Disc Lands

An athlete or participant in a discus throwing competition is not allowed to leave the discus throwing circle before the discus thrown falls to the ground. If an athlete or participant in a discus throwing competition does this, then the discus that was thrown will be considered a violation.

5. Number of Discus Throw Chances

An athlete or participant in a discus throwing sports competition is given the opportunity eight times to show his skills and the best abilities will be recapitulated or recorded in order to determine the overall result of an athlete.

6. Throwing Discs Invalid

If the disc that has been thrown falls or lands outside the zone or area that has been stipulated, then the throw will be considered as an invalid throw and will not be counted.

 

 

So, those are things about discus throwing that you can find out and identify with in this article. Are any of you athletes or interested in becoming disc athletes? There are lots of benefits that you can get from this type of athletics! So, never hesitate to pursue discus throwing, Sinaumed’s.

Find books related to sports at sinaumedia.com and make your life #MoreByReading with sinaumedia.

Definition of Destiny Mubram and Examples – In Islam, destiny is known as ‘Qodar’. The word destiny comes from the word qadara which means provision, because in fact Allah SWT has determined all matters according to His will.

Faith in destiny or Qodho and Qadar is one of the pillars of faith that every Muslim must believe in. Qodho and qadar may often be considered as continuous terms and have the same meaning, but this is not the case.

Qodho has the meaning of something that has been determined by Allah SWT for His creatures, whether in the form of creation, change, or annihilation of something. Whereas Qodar, means something that has been determined by Allah SWT since time immemorial, and Mubram’s destiny is included in it. That way, Qodar existed first, then followed by Qodho.

A good Muslim must have faith and believe in the destiny that happens in his life, whether it is good or bad destiny, Mubram’s destiny and Muallaq’s destiny. Qodar In the book Islamic Religious Education and Morals, destiny is divided into two kinds, namely the destiny of mubram and the destiny of converts.

If we discuss destiny, it refers to something that must happen in human life. Destiny can be the slightest thing, for example when we meet someone on the street.

Fortune, birth, death, fate, to one’s soul mate, all of these have been predetermined in a line of human destiny and no one can guess and no one knows, except Allah SWT.

That’s why, because we don’t have knowledge about how the destiny of our life will be, we must compete to become a Muslim who obeys Allah SWT, that is what is called the destiny of Mubram.

Then, what are the different kinds of destiny, and how is Mubram’s destiny and its examples in everyday life? Come on, see the following explanation!

Destiny Concept

Destiny, as well as Qodho and Qadar, is something that all humans on this earth do not know about destiny in their lives. Even though it is real, there are some destinies that can be changed by humans through the efforts of the humans themselves. For example, living with little finances, we can change it by working hard, then it can change our destiny.

There are wise words related to destiny, namely “the task of a human being is only to try and do the best he can, for the result, just leave everything to Allah SWT.” Well, this sentence emphasizes to humans to strive for Qodho so that it can become their Qodar.

 

 

Levels of Faith in Destiny

In fact, believing in destiny has four levels, whoever does not believe in it, means not believing in destiny.

1. Knowledge (Knowledge)

At the first level, namely knowledge or knowledge is when a person must believe that Allah SWT knows everything, from something that exists (tangible), something that doesn’t exist, or that might happen, to something that is impossible to happen and is happening. He knows in detail everything that happens in the heavens and on earth. Both His own deeds and the deeds of His creatures.

This explanation is contained in the holy book of the Koran which is found in surah Al-An’am verse 59, which means:

“And with Allah are the keys to all that is unseen; no one knows but He alone, and He knows what is on the land and in the sea, and not a leaf falls but He knows it, and not a grain falls in the darkness of the earth, and nothing is wet or dry, but written in a real book.” (QS. Al-An’am: 59).

2. Writing

The second level is writing or the Bible. In this case all humans must have faith and believe that everything has been recorded in the book regarding the entire universe until the Day of Judgment.

Allah SWT says in surah Al-Hajj verse 70 which means:

“Do you not know that Allah knows all that is in the heavens and on the earth?; that such is contained in a book (lauh mahfuzh). Verily, that is very easy for Allah.” (QS. Al-Hajj: 70).

3. Will

The third level is will. The will of Allah SWT is general in nature, so that nothing in the heavens and on earth happens without the will and desire of Allah SWT.

If Allah SWT wills it, it will happen, and if Allah SWT doesn’t want it, it will not happen. Allah says which means:

“Verily His condition when He wills something is only to say to him: “Be it!” then it happened” (QS. Yasin: 82)

4. Creation

The last level is creation. The point is, humans must have faith and believe that Allah SWT created everything that exists throughout this universe, even to the death of His creatures.

This is expressed as in the Al-Quran surah Az-Zumar verse 2, which means:

“Indeed, We have sent down to you the Book with truth. So worship Allah by purifying obedience to Him.” (QS. Az Zumar: 2).

Before discussing mubram destiny and its examples, we also need to know that the types of destiny are divided into two parts. There is a destiny that is based on the prevailing destiny, the second is a destiny that is based on God’s will and human effort.

Mubram’s Destiny and Examples and Other Destinies

1. Mubram’s Destiny

Destiny mubram according to language can be interpreted as a provision or decision that no one can avoid anymore. Any decision or anything that has happened is by the power of Allah SWT.

In terms, mubram’s destiny is absolute destiny, letter lock , patented for humans that is bound to happen, cannot be changed in any way. This is because Allah SWT has made Mubram’s destiny an absolute provision and humans are not given a role to make it happen.

Mubram’s destiny is closely related to human birth and death. In fact, how a human being is physically from the womb has been arranged in Mubram’s destiny.

The example of Mubram’s destiny covers the sex of the baby, the physical characteristics of the baby, the time of death of the human, the age of the human, to the mate.

This has also been mentioned in the Koran in surah Al-A’raf verse 34, which means:

“And each nation has. So when the time comes they cannot postpone it even for a moment nor can they advance it.” (QS. Al-A’raf: 34)

Example of Destiny Mubram

• Birth
  No one knows for sure when a woman will conceive or a couple will have a child. As humans, all we can do is try with all the limitations we have. For example, as a couple, you have spent a lot of money to do a pregnancy program, but if Allah SWT doesn’t want it, then the results won’t go according to what you expect.
• Matchmaking
  As humans, we never know for sure whether the person we are currently in a close relationship with is our soul mate. Only Allah SWT knows this, so as human beings, we only need to surrender, while trying to improve ourselves, and draw closer to Allah SWT in living life.
  Matchmaking as a destiny is as stated in the Book Loving Muhammad: The Path of Destiny of Great Women. Please click the following link to get the book.
• Death
  In matters of death, no human will ever know when his death will come. The reason is, death is a destiny that has been set in time by Allah SWT without anyone being able to know and change it.
• Natural disasters
  Tragedy of natural disasters also belongs to Mubram’s destiny. Disasters such as volcanic eruptions, earthquakes, are destiny that cannot be changed. We, as human beings, can only continue to strive and pray to Allah, the Almighty and All-Knowing when this disaster will come.
• Doomsday
  Regarding the doomsday, no one knows for sure when it will arrive. Religiously, a Muslim has been told the signs of the coming of the Day of Judgment. However, no one knows for sure when, month, date, hour the doomsday will occur.

2. Destiny Muallaq

Muallaq’s fate had a significant difference from Mubram’s. Muallaq’s destiny contains the provisions of Allah SWT which include human endeavors and efforts themselves. Indirectly, efforts, prayers, and endeavors made by humans are believed to be able to change their destiny. The things that can be changed by humans through effort and prayer include one’s goals and dreams, success, to sustenance.

Examples of Destiny Muallaq

• Being a smart kid
  The success of a child in achieving achievements in school. The child tries and learns, not just waiting for fate. He always tries hard to reach his goals. That way, what the child achieves, apart from being based on the provisions of Allah SWT’s destiny, is also assisted by the efforts and prayers that the child is doing.
• Poor people become rich
  People who initially live in poverty, but he has the urge within himself to support his family until he is sufficient. Then, that person aligns with the right lifestyle. He worked hard, ran many businesses, and was frugal, until in the end he was able to bring his family out of his former life of deprivation.
  Muallaq’s destiny has actually been written in Lauhul Mahfuz, but it can change due to two things, namely the prayers that the man himself has sincerely said and the good deeds that the man has done in his life.
  This is also found in the hadith narrated by Tirmidhi which contains:
  “Nothing can reject destiny other than prayer, and nothing can extend life except doing good.” (Narrated by Tirmidhi)

Destiny Based on Prevailing Destiny

1. General destiny (At-Taqdiirul ‘Aam)

This destiny of Allah SWT applies to all nature because He is the All-Knowing, All-Creating, and Most Willing. This is indicated in the Quran which means:

“Do you not know that Allah knows all that is in the heavens and on the earth? That such things are contained in a book (Lauh Mahfuzh). Verily, such things are very easy for Allah”. (Al-Hajj: 70)

2. Destiny that applies to humans (At-Taqdiirul Basyari)

Destiny of this type applies to all mankind, Allah SWT will later determine which people will be happy and those who will be unfortunate, it depends on the deeds and practices of each human being himself.

This is stated in the Al-Quran which means:

“And (remember), when your Lord brought forth the offspring of the sons of Adam from their sulbi and Allah testified against their souls (saying), Am I not your Lord. They said, Yes (You are our Lord), we are witnesses. (We do that) so that on the Day of Resurrection you will not say, Verily, we (Bani Adam) are the ones who are heedless of this (oneness of Rabb).” (Al-A’raaf: 172)

3. Destiny that applies to age (At-Taqdiirul ‘Umri)

In this destiny, whatever provisions will happen to all of His creatures, be it in the form of life, happiness, misery, age, until the end of death is a decree from Allah SWT.

This has been expressed as in the hadith of ash-Shadiqul Mashduq (Prophet Muhammad SAW) in Shahihain from Ibn Mas’ud, which means:

“Verily one of you collects his creation in his mother’s belly for forty days, then it becomes a clot like that (forty days), then it becomes a lump of flesh like that too, then He sends an Angel to blow the soul on him, and is commanded ( to write) in four sentences: to write his fortune, his death, his deeds, and (his) woe or happiness.”

4. Destiny that applies annually (At-Taqdiirus Sanawi)

This destiny is related to the night of Lailatul Qadar which occurs every year, namely in the month of Ramadan. Of course this blessed night is included in the destiny of Allah SWT which cannot be contested by all mankind. In the Al-Quran it is stated that:

“On that night the Angels descended and also the Archangel Jibril with the permission of their Lord to arrange all matters. That night (full of) prosperity until dawn.” (Al-Qadr:4-5)

5. Destiny that applies daily (At-Taqdiirul Yaumi)

A destiny, not only valid yearly, but also daily, even throughout human life. Be it the destiny of life, death, sustenance, even things like the rain that will fall are also determined by fate. This is explained in the Al-Quran in surah Ar-Rahman, which means:

“All the time He is busy.” (QS. Arrahman: 29)

By believing in the destiny of Allah SWT, all human beings will feel that they cannot be arrogant, because they will realize that everything has been determined by Allah SWT. In addition, humans should always be grateful and also patient for everything that has been determined and given by Allah SWT, regardless of its type.

When Muslims believe and have faith in the destiny that God has given them, they will be more optimistic and will not give up easily when living life, because there are things that can be fixed if we are willing to try.

Sinaumed’s , that’s an explanation of mubram’s destiny and examples, as well as explanations of other destiny in more detail. As good Muslims, of course we must always have faith and believe in whatever destiny happens in our lives. If #FriendsWithoutLimits has the desire to make everything happen, then try really hard, don’t forget to always pray to Allah SWT so that you will be given ease in doing it.

For those of you who want to expand your knowledge about mubram destiny and its examples, or destiny as a whole, you can #MoreWithReading other religious books that you can get at sinaumedia.com .